Tadiran Telecom T207 M/NP, M, T208 M/BL, M IP phone User Guide

Tadiran Telecom T207 M/NP, M, T208 M/BL, M IP phone User Guide
Add to My manuals

Below you will find brief information for IP phone T207 M/NP, IP phone T207 M, IP phone T208 M/BL, IP phone T208 M. This guide describes the use of Tadiran Telecom IP phones: T207/T208 series. The phones are designed to work with Coral IPx and FlexiCom systems, and provide a variety of features, including message waiting, hold, transfer, conference, and speed dialing. They can also be used to make calls to other IP phones using SIP protocol. The phones can also be connected to a PC using a LAN connection, enabling telecommuting without losing the benefits of the Coral's rich features.

advertisement

Assistant Bot

Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.

Tadiran Telecom IP phone T207 M/NP, T207 M, T208 M/BL, T208 M User Guide | Manualzz

T207M/NP, T208M/BL

T207M and T208M

IP Telephone

User Guide

(Version 15.5)

Creating a new world of IPportunities

The information contained in this document is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright, patent and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting TADIRAN TELECOM

LTD.'s (herein referred to as the "Manufacturer") rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained herein may be published, reproduced or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express, prior, written permission of the Manufacturer. In addition, any use of this document or the information contained herein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed is strictly forbidden.

The Manufacturer reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications.

Information supplied by the Manufacturer is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by the Manufacturer for the use thereof nor for the rights of third parties which may be affected in any way by the use thereof.

Any representation(s) in this document concerning performance of the Manufacturer's product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of future performance, either express or implied. The

Manufacturer's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty offered by the Manufacturer in relation thereto.

This document may contain flaws, omissions or typesetting errors; no warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in the Manufacturer's sales contract or order confirmation.

Information contained herein is periodically updated and changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions.

If you have encountered an error, please notify the Manufacturer. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

© Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD., 2006-2008.

All rights reserved worldwide.

The Coral is Protected by U.S. Patents 6,594,255; 6,598,098; 6,608,895; 6,615,404

All trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective holders.

Table of Contents

Introduction..................................................................................................................... 1

Conventions............................................................................................................. 2

Related Documentation ........................................................................................... 3

Phone Overview.............................................................................................................. 4

T207M and T207M/NP Front View .......................................................................... 4

T207M and T207M/NP with TEM Front View .......................................................... 5

T208M and T208M/BL Front View .......................................................................... 6

T208M and T208M/BL with TEM Front View........................................................... 7

Input/Output Ports and Switches ............................................................................. 8

PC Connection ........................................................................................................ 9

Bottom and Side View ........................................................................................... 10

Component Descriptions ....................................................................................... 11

Desk Elevation Installation .................................................................................... 13

Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 14

Using the Display Panel ........................................................................................ 15

Table of Contents TOC-1 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Using the Fixed and Navigator Keys ..................................................................... 17

Operating the Phone .................................................................................................... 18

Overview................................................................................................................ 18

Using the Telephony Features .............................................................................. 19

Using the Fixed Function Keys.............................................................................. 20

Second Party Speaker Status ............................................................................... 22

Using the Speakerphone or Headset .................................................................... 23

Volume Adjustment ............................................................................................... 28

Ring Adjustment .................................................................................................... 29

Making Calls .......................................................................................................... 30

Making Internal Calls ............................................................................................. 31

Making External Calls............................................................................................ 40

Receiving and Answering Calls ............................................................................. 47

During Idle ............................................................................................................. 49

Return Calls........................................................................................................... 53

Table of Contents TOC-2 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Station Telephony Features......................................................................................... 56

Overview................................................................................................................ 56

Account Code ........................................................................................................ 57

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups.................................................................................. 59

Activation Code ..................................................................................................... 63

Auto Set Relocate.................................................................................................. 64

Auto Set Relocate: Permanent .............................................................................. 65

Auto Set Relocate: Temporary .............................................................................. 66

Boss Groups.......................................................................................................... 67

Boss Groups: Using............................................................................................... 68

Boss Groups: Privacy ............................................................................................ 69

Boss Groups: Exclusive Hold ................................................................................ 70

Boss Groups: Call Forwarding............................................................................... 71

Call Forwarding / Follow Me .................................................................................. 73

Call Log ................................................................................................................. 77

Call Pickup............................................................................................................. 80

Table of Contents TOC-3 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Caller ID Control .................................................................................................... 81

Calls Waiting: Receiving........................................................................................ 82

Camp On (Call Back)............................................................................................. 84

Cancellation Code ................................................................................................. 86

Canned Messages................................................................................................. 87

Conference (Multi-Party) Calls .............................................................................. 89

Conference Calls: Meet Me ................................................................................... 90

Conference Calls: Conference Multi-Party Lock.................................................... 91

Conference Calls: Conference View/Release ...................................................... 92

COS Switchover .................................................................................................... 93

Directory ................................................................................................................ 94

Divert Call ............................................................................................................ 100

Do Not Disturb (DND).......................................................................................... 101

Do Not Disturb Override ...................................................................................... 102

ELA (Extension Line Appearance) ...................................................................... 103

ELA Group Line Keys: Programming .................................................................. 104

Table of Contents TOC-4 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

ELA Groups: Using.............................................................................................. 106

ELA Groups: Privacy ........................................................................................... 108

ELA Groups: Exclusive Hold ............................................................................... 109

Executive Privilege .............................................................................................. 110

FlexiCall............................................................................................................... 111

Freedom .............................................................................................................. 116

Group Calls.......................................................................................................... 117

Group Calls: Preset Conference Activation ......................................................... 120

Group Calls: Temporary Conference Activation .................................................. 121

Group Calls: Joining ............................................................................................ 122

Group Calls: Adding Participants (when not part of the Call) .............................. 123

Group Calls: Adding Participants (by Group Operator) ....................................... 124

Group Calls: Submitting Request to Speak ......................................................... 125

Group Calls: Controlling Permission to Speak .................................................... 126

Group Calls: Forced Release of a Participant ..................................................... 127

Group Calls: Forced Release of an Entire Group Call......................................... 128

Table of Contents TOC-5 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Headset Only....................................................................................................... 129

Help: Requesting ................................................................................................. 130

Help: Answering .................................................................................................. 131

Hold ..................................................................................................................... 132

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom....................................... 133

Malicious Call Trace ............................................................................................ 140

Messages: Options.............................................................................................. 141

Messages: Voice Mail.......................................................................................... 144

Mute Microphone................................................................................................. 155

Page Queue ........................................................................................................ 156

Paging: Announcing, Public Address .................................................................. 160

Paging: Voice Paging .......................................................................................... 161

Paging: Zone Page.............................................................................................. 163

Park ..................................................................................................................... 164

Phone Lock.......................................................................................................... 166

Programming: Feature Keys................................................................................ 167

Table of Contents TOC-6 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming: Button Labeling ............................................................................ 176

Recording a Call .................................................................................................. 178

Redial .................................................................................................................. 179

Relay (Accessory) .............................................................................................. 182

Reminder ............................................................................................................. 183

Room Status........................................................................................................ 185

Series Call ........................................................................................................... 187

Silent Monitoring.................................................................................................. 188

Speed Dialing: Private Library ............................................................................. 191

Speed Dialing: Using Private and Public Libraries .............................................. 195

Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) for Other Common Carriers (OCC)........................ 196

Transfer (Xfer) ..................................................................................................... 197

Transfer: Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call ....................................... 201

Wakeup ............................................................................................................... 205

Whisper Paging ................................................................................................... 207

Table of Contents TOC-7 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Attendant Features ..................................................................................................... 209

Available Functions ............................................................................................. 209

Call Forward ........................................................................................................ 212

Canned Messages............................................................................................... 214

Malicious Call Trace ............................................................................................ 217

Room Status........................................................................................................ 218

WakeUp............................................................................................................... 220

Call Charge.......................................................................................................... 222

Station Setup Features........................................................................................ 224

System Features ................................................................................................. 227

Trunk Setup Features.......................................................................................... 233

Setup............................................................................................................................ 238

Overview.............................................................................................................. 238

Coral Telephony Features ................................................................................... 239

User Definitions Menu ......................................................................................... 246

System Definitions Menu..................................................................................... 249

Table of Contents TOC-8 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Appendix A: Glossary ................................................................................................ 250

Appendix B: Tones ..................................................................................................... 255

Appendix C: LED Indications (Programmable Keys) .............................................. 258

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers........................................................................... 259

Appendix E: Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 265

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes ........................................................................ 267

Table of Contents TOC-9 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Introduction

The T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL or Terminal with soft keys meets all your telephony and office needs. It combines the ability to communicate with the IP world with the solid dependability and high level of functionality available from the Coral. It can be used in a typical office environment or can connect to the Coral via the IP environment from an external location, enabling telecommuting without losing the benefits of the Coral’s rich features.

The benefits you receive from working with the phone will become an invaluable part of your work environment. While the technology employed in the phone is state of the art, using the telephone is simple and straightforward. You will immediately appreciate the easy to reach soft keys. Depending on the state of the telephone, the display automatically changes to provide you with the appropriate options.

The phone or Terminal with soft keys is a fully functional keyset that meets all your telephony and office needs. It combines the ability to communicate with the IP world with the solid dependability and high level of functionality available from the

Coral.Many of the feature options, which have been assigned during initial installation, are provided on an extension (station) basis. Feature allocation may also be redefined to suit changing working stations or adapted to your individual requirements by your system administrator. Not every feature in this guide may have been installed in your system, or at your extension.

Check with your system administrator for a list of the specific features installed. In addition, Coral features are subject to COS authorization and some features require a later Coral Main Software version. For more information, contact your system administrator.

This User Guide provides a full description of the capabilities and operation of the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL terminals.

The main section of this guide is organized according to the two distinct feature types – Station Features and Attendant

Features. The appendices, located at the end of this guide, give basic explanations of special terms and operations used throughout the guide, and are useful to consult for a fuller explanation of telephony terms.

NOTE! T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL require Coral Version 15.5 and higher.

Introduction 1 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Conventions

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this guide.

Example Description

Icons are used to represent the actual fixed and navigator keys.

See

page 17

for a complete listing.

[ARdl]

OK

HOLD

Soft key names appear in a clear distinctive box.

See

page 268

for a complete listing.

Emphasized (bold) text indicates fixed function keys or Direct Station

Selection (DSS) user programmable keys.

See

page 20

for a complete listing.

The scroll icon ( ) indicates that the following soft keys (when available) can be used to scroll through lists:

[Next], [Prev], [f-Up]

,

[f-Dn]

,

[p-Up], [p-Dn].

Press

[SRm#]

and enter the station/room number, or scroll through the list using .

See

Ring Adjustment

EXCLUSIVE HOLD

Text in italics refers you to another section of the guide or to other Coral system manuals. The blue font indicates that this is a clickable crossreference link. Italicized text is also used for notes.

Text in Courier font indicates a display message

Introduction

Conventions

2 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Related Documentation

• Program Interface and Database Reference Manual (Version 15.5 or higher)

• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL Installation, Administration and Hardware Reference Manual

• SeaMail User Guide for Coral IPx Office systems

Introduction

Related Documentation

3 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Phone Overview

T207M and T207M/NP Front View

4 Soft keys

Flashing ring and message waiting indicator

Speaker

Graphic display

Navigator keys

Handset

4 User programmed keys with removable faceplate

TEM connector

Dial pad

(key pad)

Phone Overview

T207M and T207M/NP Front View

Volume button

9 Fixed function keys

4

Microphone

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

T207M and T207M/NP with TEM Front View

4 Soft keys

Flashing ring and message waiting indicator

Speaker

Graphic display

Navigator keys

Handset

4 User programmed keys with removable faceplate

Dial pad

(key pad)

Volume button

Phone Overview

T207M and T207M/NP with TEM Front View

9 Fixed function keys

5

Microphone

TEM expansion module

2x 22 user programmable keys with removable faceplate

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

T208M and T208M/BL Front View

4 Soft keys

Flashing ring and message waiting indicator

Speaker

Handset

Graphic display

Navigator keys

4 User programmed keys with removable faceplate

Dial pad

(key pad)

TEM connector

Volume button

Phone Overview

T208M and T208M/BL Front View

9 Fixed function keys

6

Microphone

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

T208M and T208M/BL with TEM Front View

4 Soft keys

Flashing ring and message waiting indicator

Speaker

Graphic display

Navigator keys

Handset

Dial pad

(key pad)

4 User programmed keys with removable faceplate

TEM expansion module

2x 22 user programmable keys with removable faceplate

Volume button

Phone Overview

T208M and T208M/BL with TEM Front View

9 Fixed function keys

7

Microphone

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Input/Output Ports and Switches

These ports are located on the bottom of the phone (see the figure on

page 10

).

Component Description

Reset Button

Used to reset the phone to its factory set default values.

Link/Activity

Indicators

Caution:Resetting the phone will rerase all of the defined settings.

Indicates whether there is LAN/Intranet and/or PC activity.

LAN Connector

Socket

Use this RJ-45 connector port to connect your phone to the LAN/WAN.

PC Connector Socket

Use this RJ-45 connector port when only one LAN/WAN outlet is available in your immediate vicinity. Connect your PC’s LAN wire to this connection socket while the phone is connected to the LAN/WAN.

Power Adapter Input

Used to connect the AC power adapter to the phone to supply the required DC power when PoE is unavailable.

Note: An AC power adapter supplying 5VDC...2A maximum is required. It is not supplied with the phone and must be ordered from the manufacturer only. The use of any other power adapter will void the warranty.

Power Source

Selector (available on some phones)

Adapter — Switch to this option when a power adapter is connected to the phone.

PoE: Power over Ethernet — Switch to this option to enable power for the phone over your LAN/WAN connection.

Handset Cord Port

Headset Wire Port

Connect the Handset cord to this RJ-9 port.

Connect the Headset to this RJ-9 port.

Phone Overview

Input/Output Ports and Switches

8 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

PC Connection

The PC can be connected to the LAN/WAN via the phone. The phone will always be active, even when the PC is turned off.

AC power adapter

-

+

5VDC...2A

DC-IN

LAN PC

CAUTION!

The phone is not shipped with an AC power adapter. The ONLY AC power adapter that may be used with the phone is one purchased from the manufacturer.

*The use of any other AC power adapter will void the warranty*

Phone Overview

PC Connection

9 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Bottom and Side View

Bottom view

Wall-mount hole

Product label

Service door

Reset

Adapter

Source

PoE

Left view

Handset

Handset connection

Headset connections

Right view

Reset button

Link/

Activity green LED indicators

LAN

PC

-

DC-IN Power Source

Adapter

PoE

Power adapter input

Power source selector

(available on some phones)

Phone Overview

Bottom and Side View

10

TEM connector

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Component Descriptions

The following table defines controls, buttons and keys found on the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL.

Component Description

Dial Pad (Key Pad) Digit keys used for dialing phone numbers or extension numbers.

Fixed Function

Keys

Nine keys for basic features: MSG, CONF, DIR, HEADSET, XFER, REDIAL, HOLD, MUTE, SPKR

(see

page 20

).

Fixed key

Graphic Display

OK (see

Using the Fixed and Navigator Keys on page 17)

.

Displays pertinent calling/menu/line information, based on the phone status (e.g., idle, busy, dialing...).

T207M and T207M/NP display size: three lines (128x32 pixels): System lines (1st and 2nd lines), and function options (on 3rd line) according to phone status. See

page 15

.

T208M and T208M/BL display size: six lines (128x64 pixels): System lines (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th lines), and function options (on 6th line) according to phone status. See

page 16

.

Handset

Handset Latch

Headset

Hook Switch

Loudspeaker

Microphone

Works as typical phone handset.

Used to catch the handset when wall mounted or for elevated (60° or higher) desktop mounts.

Non-manufacturer headset purchased by customer (see

On-hook or off-hook for handset.

Output sound device used in hands free operation, paging and ringing.

Input sound device used in hands free operation.

page 22 ,

page 27

, and page 241

).

Phone Overview

Component Descriptions

11 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Component

Navigator Keys

Description

Programmable

Keys (DSS)

and

Up/down, right/left arrows used to move from one option to another

on the display. Used for selecting without choosing or activating the option. See

Using the Fixed and

Navigator Keys on page 17

.

Provides a shortcut to a string of dial commands or telephone number, by using a pre-defined key, known as a DSS (Direct Station Selection) key. Instead of dialing a number or dial commands, this can be done by pressing the programmed key.

Several dial commands, in a series, may be programmed into one DSS key - useful for one-button speed dialing, voice response and voice mail system access, and other complex dialing patterns.

There are Four user programmable keys on the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL. A green

LED lights when a key is activated. See

Programming: Feature Keys on page 167

.

Ring and Message

Waiting Lamp

Soft keys

Lamp flashes at a slow rate, indicating that a message is waiting.

Lamp flashes at a faster rate (to the beat of the ring) when the phone is ringing.

Located below the display panel, keys used to directly activate the feature option. See

Using the

Telephony Features on page 19 .

TEM

Volume Key

Optional expansion module used to add additional programmable buttons to the phone. These programmable buttons may be configured only from the phone or its web page.

2 x 22 programmable buttons.

Use the shift left and right keys to enable another 22 buttons. See

page 170

.

Adjust the volume (see

Volume Adjustment on page 28

) of the following components:

• Ringer - from idle or while the phone is ringing (see

Ring Adjustment on page 29

)

• Speaker/Handset/Headset - during a conversation (see

Using the Speakerphone or Headset on page 23

)

Phone Overview

Component Descriptions

12 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Desk Elevation Installation

The T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL can be placed on your desk at different angles.

NOTE! For full instructions regarding desk elevation, refer to the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/

BL Installation Manual.

Step A Step B Step C

Step D Step E Step F

Phone Overview

Desk Elevation Installation

30

Low

13

45

Medium

60

High

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Wall Mounting

The T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL can be wall mounted when required.

NOTE! For full instructions regarding wall mounting your phone, refer to the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL Installation Manual.

Phone Overview

Wall Mounting

Phone

(right view)

Wall

14 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Using the Display Panel

The phone Display provides an easy-to-use control interface. On this display several different classes of function information and controls are found. During normal operation the active function assumes control over the entire area of the display and all of the soft keys. Meanwhile, the System Lines (1 st

and 2 nd

lines) which usually, in idle state, include the time, date, site name

(T208M and T208M/BL only), station name and number, automatically change to relay pertinent information about telephony states and operations, and the calling party’s information.

Four soft keys located immediately below the display screen, act as triggers for any currently displayedphone function or option. All of the information on the display panel (bottom line) continually changes to reflect options related to the current state of the phone. In this manner, no matter which state the telephone is in (i.e. Idle, Ringing, etc.) the relevant option is always next to and enabled by one of the soft keys.

Ring and Message

Waiting Indicator

Time & Date

10:50 26 May 2007

User Name Station Numb er

Msg Log Dir Fwd

System Information Lines

Feature Options

Soft Keys

T207M and T207M/NP Display Panel

Phone Overview

Using the Display Panel

15 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Ring and Message

Waiting Indicator

Time & Date

10:50 26 May 2007

Site Name

User Name Station Numb er

Msg Log Dir Fwd

System Information Lines

Feature Options

Soft Keys

T208M and T208M/BL Display Panel

Phone Overview

Using the Display Panel

16 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Using the Fixed and Navigator Keys

The following table lists all the phone fixed keys and describes the actions they invoke.

Fixed Key

OK

Action

Activates a telephony feature after selecting it with the navigator keys (same as using the soft key).

Press and hold down

OK

OK

Provides access to all the functions availabe during idle via the Features menu and provides access to the other Main Menu options (see

page 49

).

NOTE! In order for the Main Menu options to appear on the display panel, you must press and

hold the OK key for at least three seconds.

Moves the cursor (

→) left and right, or goes to the next or previous menu or list when the cursor is at the end of a line.

OK

Used to scroll soft key option lists when ↓ , or ↑ appear on the display line above the soft keys. Press one menu or list.

to scroll back one menu or list; to scroll forward

Phone Overview

Using the Fixed and Navigator Keys

17 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Operating the Phone

Overview

Operating the phone is as simple as pressing a button. Operate the phone using a combination of soft and fixed keys. The phone options appear in the display area on the bottom line of the display panel, and automatically change to reflect the current state of the telephone.

Four soft keys, located immediately below the display panel, allow you to enable the relevant options as they appear. The soft key options change every time the phone status changes.

Nine fixed function keys are provided, the functions of which are system-wide programmable. Typical functions for these

keys are:MSG, XFER, CONF, REDIAL, DIR, HOLD, HEADSET, MUTE, AND SPKR (see

Using the Fixed and

Navigator Keys on page 17)

.

Soft key functions can also be selected by pressing on the navigator keys. Pressing on the respective arrow moves the location of the cursor to the next function. To activate the required function, press the OK key.

Use

[Esc]

to bring the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, or T208M/BL display to the beginning of the soft key options. When the

[Esc]

soft key does not appear on the display panel, press the left key instead to return to the previous soft key options.

Press up/down keys and to scroll through lines of the soft key feature options. Press left/right keys and to move from one option to the next on the displayed line.

A selected option is indicated by an arrow at its left (

→ Fwd).

Additional options on a lower line of the display are indicated by a down arrow (

Msg).

Additional options on a higher line of the display are indicated by an up arrow (

Room).

Additional options on both a lower and higher line of the display are indicated by a double arrow ( Remd).

An activated option is indicated by a bullet at its left (

• Fwd).

A selected and activated option is indicated by a bold arrow at its left ($

Fwd).

Operating the Phone

Overview

18 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Using the Telephony Features

You do not have to memorize any access codes to activate any of the rich array of Coral system telephony features.

Each state change in the phone (such as from idle to ring, ring to answer, answer to transfer, etc.) causes the associated staterelated features to appear on the display panel. Simply choose the feature you would like to activate by pressing its associated soft key. When the feature is activated, a bullet appears next to the feature. As shown below, while in Idle mode when DND

(Do Not Disturb) is off, no bullet appears next to DND. When DND is activated, a bullet is displayed next to DND.

Page 1

→ DND

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

FlxC Redl PgQ

DND OFF

Page 2

→ •DND

*DND* user name station number

FlxC Redl PgQ

DND ON

NOTE! Figures depicting the various display panel (4-soft key) options appear throughout this guide.

Where a list, menu or sub-menu continues through several lines, these are indicated as Page 1,

Page 2, etc. The location of the soft key options that appear in the figures in this guide may differ from their actual locations on your phone.

Several telephony features are toggle switches. Therefore, the first time you press a feature’s soft key, the feature is activated or turned on. The second time you press the same feature’s soft key, the feature is canceled or turns off automatically.

See

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes on page 267

for an alphabetic list of all available feature options.

Operating the Phone

Using the Telephony Features

19 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Using the Fixed Function Keys

Ninephone buttons are programmed during installation, and are the same for each keyset system-wide. These fixed system keys cannot be programmed from the telephone, and can only be changed by the system administrator. The nine fixed keys features are:

Feature

MSG

/ MSG

CONF

/ CONF

DIR

/ DIR

1

4 ghi

2 abc

5 jkl def

6 mno

7 pqrs

*

8 tuv

0

MSG XFER wxyz

#

VOL

CONF

REDIAL

DIR

HOLD

HEADSET MUTE SPKR

Fixed Keys

Description

Used to leave messages at other stations, view and answer messages left at your station,and

access your personal voice messaging system. See

“Messages: Options” on page 141

and

“Messages: Voice

Mail” on page 144

.

Used as 3-Way when COS is defined for 3-Way Conference Call.

See “Transfer: 3-Way Conference” on page 203.

Used to search and place calls from the Shared and Personal directories.

See “Directory” on page 94.

Operating the Phone

Using the Fixed Function Keys

20 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Feature Description

HEADSET

/ HEADSET

XFER / XFER

Used to activate/deactivate

Headset

mode. A green LED indicates that

Headset

mode is activated.

See “Headset Only” on page 129.

While engaged on a call you can activate a feature by pressing the Transfer key. When using Transfer, a special distinctive dial tone is heard, enabling you to either transfer the call, or activate a feature.

Transfer puts the second party on Hold and provides one of the following: music, ring-back tone, busy

tone or no sound at all, as defined system-wide.

See “Transfer (Xfer)” on page 197.

REDIAL

HOLD

MUTE

SPKR

/ REDIAL

/ HOLD

/ MUTE

/

SPKR

Used to redial the last number (most recent number) dialed from this phone.

See “Redial” on page 179.

The Hold key is used for placing a party on Hold while another call is made or received. The held party can hear one of the following: music, ring-back tone, busy tone or no sound at all, as defined system-

wide.

See “Hold” on page 132.

Used to activate/deactivate the voice transmit from this phone. A red LED indicates that the Mute

feature in on. (see

Mute Microphone on page 155)

.

The Speaker key is used to converse hands-free. When conversing through the speaker, voice volume can be adjusted. Volume of call monitoring, paging, etc. can also be adjusted by using the volume

control key. A green LED is associated to indicate its status. See

page 23

and

page 28

.

Operating the Phone

Using the Fixed Function Keys

21 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Second Party Speaker Status

ANSWER (2nd party)

(2nd party) SPKR ON

↓→ PgQ

Xfer Hold Mute

This feature alerts you when the loudspeaker of the party you are conversing with is activated for hands-free or group conversation. A Speaker tone and display message notify you when the called/calling party is in SPKR mode, or if they switch to SPKR mode during a call.

Therefore, when advised that the second party's keyset (FlexSet, FlexSet-IP, DKT, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL) is in Speakerphone mode, you can choose to refrain from publicizing private information.

Detection of your party's activated loudspeaker:

A speaker tone is heard and the SPKR ON message flashes on the second line of the display:

• when you answer a call initiated with an activated loudspeaker

• when the called party answered you with an activated loudspeaker

• during a call, when the second party activates the loudspeaker

Operating the Phone

Second Party Speaker Status

22 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Using the Speakerphone or Headset

The phone is equipped with a speaker so that it can operate as a speakerphone. This enables you to converse without lifting the handset. Pressing the speakerphone

(SPKR)

key automatically switches on the microphone and speaker. All dialing or conversation is automatically hands-free; the handset remains on the cradle.

There are, however, several ways of using the speaker key, such as: in conjunction with a headset, or when

SPKR

is programmed for on/off operation, and using the

[S/HS]

(Speaker/Handset) soft key to switch between the handset and the speaker.

Hands-Free Conversation

With handset on cradle:

When the handset is on the cradle and

SPKR

flashes, you can speak hands-free by pressing the flashing

SPKR

key or by using one of the methods described in

Adjusting the ring type: on page 29

.

Switchover from speakerphone to handset:

When you are using the speakerphone and want to use the handset for private conversation, lift the handset. The

SPKR

key

LED will go off.

Switchover from handset to speakerphone:

When you are using the handset and want to use the speakerphone, first press

SPKR

. When the

SPKR

key LED is lit, replace the handset on the cradle.

Disconnecting calls:

Either press the lit

SPKR

key when the handset is on the cradle or replace the handset onto the cradle when the

SPKR

key

LED is off.

Call monitoring (when programmed for combined audio):

When you are using the handset and wish to activate the speaker for group listening, press

SPKR

. When the LED is lit, the combined audio is active. To return to private conversation, press

SPKR

again. The LED will go off.

Operating the Phone

Using the Speakerphone or Headset

23 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Using the S/HS Soft key (when the phone is programmed for SPKR On/Off key):

When using headset (or handset is off cradle):

When your phone is equipped with a headset, you can answer and disconnect calls by pressing the

SPKR

On/Off key. When the

SPKR

key LED is lit, you are connected. Pressing the lit key will disconnect the call. To switch between handset and hands-free operation, you must press

[S/HS]

from the phone display.

With handset on cradle:

If the phone rings and

SPKR

flashes, you can speak hands-free by pressing the flashing

SPKR

key. The key LED will now be steadily lit.

Switchover from speakerphone to handset:

When you are using the speakerphone and want to use the handset for private conversation, lift the handset. The

SPKR

key

LED will remain lit.

Switchover from handset to speakerphone:

When you are using the handset and want to use the speakerphone, first press

[S/HS]

, then when the LED is lit, place the handset on the cradle.

Disconnecting calls:

There are two ways to disconnect calls:

• Pressing the lit

SPKR

key.

• Returning the handset or pressing hookswitch when

[S/HS]

is off (a bullet is not displayed).

Operating the Phone

Using the Speakerphone or Headset

24 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

When the Phone is programmed as Headset Only and for SPKR On/Off key

When your phone is equipped with a headset:

When the Headset Only feature is activated (see

Headset Only on page 129)

, and

SPKR

is set to operate as On/Off (connect/ release) switch, you can answer and disconnect calls by pressing

SPKR

.

When the key LED is lit:

You are connected. Pressing the lit key will disconnect the call.

Disconnecting calls:

Press the lit

SPKR

key.

NOTES!

• See your system administrator to program SPKR to operate as an On/Off switch.

• When the phone is set for Zip Tone mode (see page 249), the ring sounds at the headset only, rather than

through the speaker.

• If the phone is defined as Headset Only (see

Headset Only on page 129)

, the speakerphone will not operate.

Operating the Phone

Using the Speakerphone or Headset

25 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Headset

(purchased by the customer)

Earpiece, electronic ringer

Microphone

Speaker

4 Soft keys

Flashing ring and message waiting indicator

Graphic display

Navigator keys

Handset

Dial pad

(key pad)

Operating the Phone

Using the Speakerphone or Headset

Volume button

9 Fixed function keys

26

4 User programmed keys with removable faceplate

Microphone

TEM expansion module

2x 22 user programmable keys with removable faceplate

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Headset Cord Disconnect

• Headset Cord Disconnect enables activating a selected preprogrammed key by disconnecting the handset/headset cord.

The feature enables you to automatically invoke a keyset function such as Do Not Disturb, Login/Logout, Attended/

Unattended, Call Forward, or any other preprogrammed key function, upon disconnection of the headset cord.

• One of the Headset Cord Disconnect purposes is to block a telephone from accepting calls when the headset cord is disconnected. Any call forwarding to the keyset will be automatically cancelled when the feature is activated.

• This feature is generally combined with the Headset Only feature to allow calls to be conducted via the headset/handset even if the cradle switch is on-hook.

NOTE! The Headset Cord Disconnect feature does not work with all headset equipment. The feature is operable only with headsets that do not use auxiliary equipment, such as splitters, volume amplifiers, external headset/handset switches.

• See your system administrator for the programmable button assigned for this feature.

• The corresponding button should be programmed to perform the required function.

Operation

• If a button is preprogrammed with a feature having ON/OFF states (e.g. Do Not Disturb), the system will toggle the feature Off when the Cord is connected, and On when the Cord is disconnected. The Login/Logout function is excluded from this rule, as it operates in the reverse mode.

• If the button is programmed with a feature without ON/OFF states, the system will operate the same key contents when connecting/disconnecting the cord (e.g. dialing an external number).

• When enabled by disconnecting the cord, the feature can be disabled also by pressing the button.

• The feature activated by pressing a button when the cord is plugged in, will remain active when the cord is disconnected.

• Connecting the cord will cancel the feature that has been activated by pressing a programmable button or dialing a feature code when the cord was disconnected.

Operating the Phone

Using the Speakerphone or Headset

27 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Volume Adjustment

Press the volume keyto increase or decrease the volume of the phone loudspeaker and handset.

While the volume is being changed, the top line of the display shows the volume level.

Speaker volume levels range from a MIN unit value of 0 to a MAX unit value of 9 (14dB range).

The Handset volume level ranges from a MIN unit value of 0 to a MAX unit value of 9 (14dB range).

Speaker and Handset each has its own audio level and is independently influenced by volume buttons as follows:

Speaker: When conversing through the speaker, voice volume can be adjusted. Volume of call monitoring, paging, etc. can also be adjusted. This can also be done from idle.

Speakerphone: When conversing hands-free, the built-in sensitive microphone is used to amplify your voice. The system operates in such a way that the two connecting parties (i.e. you and the far side) cannot be heard simultaneously; the stronger party is heard. Press VOL

+

to hear the far side more strongly, press VOL

-

to be heard more easily (or to break in).

Handset: When conversing through the handset or headset, receiver volume can be adjusted.

Operating the Phone

Volume Adjustment

28 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Ring Adjustment

.

The phone ring volume can be changed from idle, or by using the volume key while the phone is ringing. You can use this to change the ring of two different telephones in the same room. Also note that the Message Lamp lights in beat with the ring while the phone is ringing.

CAUTION!

The Ringer is disabled and the phone cannot receive calls when DND or Call Forward All is activated.

Adjusting the ring volume level while ringing:

Press the up (+) or down (-) volume key. The ring volume level ranges from 0 (MIN ring) to 9 (MAX ring).

Adjusting the ring level from idle:

1. Press and hold OK and choose [Userdef].

2. Choose Ring Volume.

3. Adjust volume using the volume key (see

Volume Adjustment on page 28

).

4. Press [Save].

Adjusting the ring type:

Used to adjust the ring type of your phone in order to distinguish between incoming internal, external and voice page

1. Press and hold OK and choose [Userdef].

2. Choose Ring Type.

3. Choose Internal, External or Voice Page.

4. Adjust ring type as described in

“Ring Type” on page 247

.

Operating the Phone

Ring Adjustment

29 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Making Calls

To place a call use any of the following methods:

• Lift the handset and dial from the dial pad.

• Press

SPKR

and begin dialing directly from the dial pad.

• Begin dialing without lifting the handset. The Speaker is automatically activated.

• Press any idle (LED not lit) DSS or

LOOP

,

LOOP

originating only, or

LINE

key, and after hearing a dial tone begin dialing.

NOTE! If you receive error messages when attempting to connect, refer to

Appendix E: Troubleshooting on page 265

at the end of this document.

The options available in each of the selected phone states are described on the following pages:

Making Internal Calls

Upon Hearing Ringback Tone

.......................................................page 31

Upon Hearing Reorder Tone

.........................................................page 33

Upon Hearing Busy Tone

..............................................................page 34

During a Call

.................................................................................page 37

During a Break In

..........................................................................page 39

Making External Calls

When Making External Calls:

........................................................page 40

Upon Hearing Ringback Tone

.......................................................page 42

Upon Hearing Busy Tone

..............................................................page 44

During a Call

.................................................................................page 45

Operating the Phone

Making Calls

30 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Making Internal Calls

Upon Hearing Ringback Tone

After dialing an internal destination number, the following features appear on your phone display when you hear a ringback tone. Wait for answer or press the nearby soft key to activate the required feature.

See

page 19

for further details.

NOTE!

A message indicating the called party’s status (or other relevant information) may appear on the second line of the display until you answer the call

(see Canned Messages on page 87)

.

INTERNAL called number or name

↓→ Msg.

Camp VPg Mute

[Msg.]

or MSG Leave Message. If no one answers your call, use this feature to leave a “message” at the called party’s station. This feature lights the message waiting lamp at the called party’s station indicating that a message was left, and it leaves a simple message such as CALL SUSAN on the destination station’s keyset display.

See

Messages: Options on page 141

.

[MsgW]

[Camp]

[VPg]

Message Waiting. The Attendant can use this feature to leave a message waiting indication at a busy or idle station, room or group. See

Leaving a message indication at a busy or non-answering station: on page 143

.

Camp On, also known as Call Back. When a station does not answer, you may request that the system automatically call you back when the required destination number is available. See

Camp On (Call Back) on page 84

.

Voice Page the called party’s keyset station using this feature. Your call is automatically answered and your voice heard over the called party’s speakerphone. See

Paging: Voice Paging on page 161

.

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

31 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during ringback so that when the call is answered your side of the conversation is muted and the called party will not hear you. When this feature is activated by the MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone

(see

Mute Microphone on page 155)

.

[Num]

Number is used to briefly display the caller’s dial number instead of the name.

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

32 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Upon Hearing Reorder Tone

After dialing an internal station that is idle, but has been set to Do Not Disturb or UNATTEND, the following features are available. After dialing a station and receiving a reorder tone, override can be applied by pressing

[oDND]

.

DONT DIST called number or name

↓→ Msg.

Camp BrkI 2Rng

[Camp]

Camp On, also known as Call Back. Use this feature to have the system automatically call you back when

the DND destination station becomes available. See

Camp On (Call Back) on page 84

.

Not used during reorder tone.

[2Rng]

[VPg]

Voice Page the called party’s keyset station using this feature. Your call is automatically answered and your voice heard over the called party’s speakerphone after the Voice Page tone stops. See

Paging: Voice Paging on page 161

.

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during reorder tone so that when the Do Not Disturb is overridden, your side of the conversation is muted and the called party will not hear anything. When this feature is activated by the

[Mute] or MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone. See

Mute Microphone on page 155

.

[Msg.]

or MSG Leave Message. Use this feature to leave a “message” at the called party’s station. This feature lights the message waiting lamp at the called party’s station indicating that a message was left, and it leaves a simple

message such as CALL SUSAN on the destination station’s display. See

Messages: Options on page 141

.

[BrkI]

[oDND]

Break In

operates as

[oDND]

.

DND Override enables an authorized user to send a ring tone thus overriding the Do Not Disturb status.

When you hear the reorder tone, if DON’T DIST or UNATTENDED message appears, override can be applied and your call can be put through to the station. See

Do Not Disturb Override on page 102

.

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

33 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Upon Hearing Busy Tone

After dialing an internal destination number, the following features appear on your display when you hear a busy tone. Hang up or press one of the soft keys.

NOTE! Whereas the top line on stations displays the number or name of the called busy party, Attendant

Consoles display this information about both conversing parties.

BUSY

↓→ Msg.

called number or name

Camp VPg

Station display

Mute party #1 BUSY party #2

↓→ Msg.

Camp VPg

Attendant console display

Mute

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

34 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Msg.]

or MSG Leave Message. Use this feature to leave a “message” at a busy station. This feature lights the message waiting lamp at the busy station and leaves a simple message such as CALL SUSAN on the destination

station’s keyset display. See

Messages: Options on page 141

.

[MsgW]

[Camp]

[BrkI]

Message Waiting. The Attendant can use this feature to leave a message waiting indication at a busy or idle station, room or group. See

Leaving a message indication at an idle station: on page 142

.

Camp On, also known as Call Back. Use this feature to have the system automatically call you back when the busy destination station is available. See

Calls Waiting: Receiving on page 82

.

Break-In enables an authorized user to break into an established two party call. Both conversing parties will hear the Break In warning tone. Your voice will be heard after the warning tone stops. During Break-In you

can release the ports or alternate between parties. See

During a Break In on page 39

.

NOTE! Only stations with appropriate COS may activate the Break-In feature.

[2Rng]

[VPg]

Send Call Waiting is used to send a call waiting tone to the busy party. This feature is also known as Call

Waiting or Call Offer. The station is now aware that another call is waiting. Your side hears a second

(quicker) ringback tone (system-wide defined).

Voice Page the called party’s keyset station using this feature. The other party receives a message that they are being paged. Your voice is heard over the called party’s speakerphone after the warbling tone stops. See

Paging: Voice Paging on page 161

.

[Num]

Number is used to briefly display the caller’s dial number instead of the name.

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during busy tone so that if you break-in, your side of the conversation is muted for silent monitoring (handset, headset and speakerphone). When this feature is activated by the

[Mute]

or MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

35 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[SM2]

[Wait] deactivates the microphone for your speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone. See

Mute Microphone on page 155

.

2-Way Silent Monitoring is used to monitor both sides of a 2-way conversation simultaneously. This feature can be activated from idle, or while attempting to call a busy or non-answering destination. At the prompt,

dial the station or dial number. See

Silent Monitoring on page 188

.

Calls Waiting can be used to view the number of calls waiting for you during a conversation. See

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups on page 59

.

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

36 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

During a Call

The following features are available during an internal call:

ANSWER 2nd party name or number

↓→ PgQ

Xfer Hold Mute

[PgQ]

[Park]

[Num]

Page Queue places your call on hold by sending it to one of ten Page Queue destinations. You are then free to page all the system members from your phone and announce that there is a call for Mr. Doe on a specific Page

Queue Line. The call can be picked up from any system station. See

Page Queue on page 156

.

[Xfer]

Transfer passes your call to another destination. Pressing

[Xfer] places the called party on Hold. Dial a number

(internal or external), and disconnect to transfer the call, or first announce the call and then disconnect. See

Transfer (Xfer) on page 197

.

Hold places the active call on hold. See

Hold on page 132

.

[Hold]

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during a conversation to mute your side of the conversation (handset, headset and speaker-phone). When this feature is activated by the

[Mute]

or MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your

speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone.

(see

Mute

Microphone on page 155)

.

[Wait]

Calls Waiting can be used to view the number of calls waiting for you during a conversation. See

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups on page 59

.

Park your call at your station so that you can pick it up at another system station. See

Park on page 164

.

Number is used to briefly display the caller’s dial number instead of the name.

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

37 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[S/HS]

[Priv]

[eHld]

[WDND]

Speaker/Headset toggles between speaker and the handset operation. See

Using the Speakerphone or

Headset on page 23

.

Privacy puts your phone into Privacy mode. This prevents other members of your Boss Group or ELA

Group from accidentally joining your conversations.

Exclusive Hold puts your phone into Exclusive Hold mode. This ensures that a call placed on hold can be retrieved only at your station. If Exclusive Hold is cancelled, the call put on hold can be retrieved by any other member of your Boss Group or ELA Group.

Do Not Disturb - Whisper Page is used to enable or block your phone from receiving a message whispered by another station. When this feature is activated, a bullet appears next to

[WDND]

. If you press while on a call, the feature will be active for the duration of the current call only.

NOTE: Whisper page receiving is not available on the current version of the phone.

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

38 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

During a Break In

After dialing a busy destination number and choosing

[BrkI]

(see

Upon Hearing Busy Tone on page 34)

, both conversing parties can hear your voice. You may press

SPKR

or hang up in order to allow the continuation of the call, or press on one of the following soft keys.

B TO called number or name

↓→ Xfer

Mute fRls Dest

[Xfer]

Transfer is used to converse in private with the caller party (from the original 2-way call). The called party is released. See

Transfer (Xfer) on page 197

.

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during a Break In to mute your side, allowing you to listen to the conversation but not speak. When this feature is activated by

[Mute]

or MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your speakerphone and

handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone (see

page 155

).

[fRls]

[Dest]

[Src]

Forced Release enables an authorized user to end the conversation and release two ports actively connected to each other.

Destination is used to converse, in private, with the 3 rd

party. The called party is put on hold. Press again for

3-way conversation.

Source is used to converse, in private, with the called party. The 3 rd

party is put on hold. Press again for 3way conversation.

[Wait]

[Num]

[S/HS]

Calls Waiting can be used to view the number of calls waiting for you during a conversation.

Number is used to briefly display the two port dial numbers instead of the names.

Speaker/Headset toggles between speaker and the handset operation. See

Using the Speakerphone or

Headset on page 23

.

Operating the Phone

Making Internal Calls

39 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Making External Calls

When Making External Calls:

• In some systems an outside dial tone must be heard before dialing can begin.

• In some systems using Automatic Routing Selection, internal dial tone or no tone is heard after dialing the access code.

• In some cases (as defined by Class of Service) dialing must begin with a Forced Account code before the called number can be dialed. When Forced Account code is required, the distinctive dial tone will be heard after dialing the external line code, and the ENTER ACCOUNT # message appears on the top line. See

Account Code on page 57

and

Caller ID

Control on page 81

.

Stop Dial

.

Press

[Stop] or # after the external number to tell the system that you have finished sending digits over a trunk line. In response the system sends your call immediately towards the destination without waiting for inter-digit time out.

• In certain systems the cost, or number of meter units of the call are displayed, after an external call terminates. This appears for a short while, or until another call is made or received, in the format defined for your system.

• Some systems may be programmed with a limit to the duration of outgoing externals calls. Once the limit is reached, the call will be automatically disconnected.

• On external calls routed via an ISDN trunk, call messages are displayed (such as connection status, call fail, etc.). Most messages are for system administrators and technicians and will not be seen during normal operation (see the Message

Definitions table below).

NO B.C:

Message

NON ISDN ROUTE:

QUE GROUP #:

Definition

If the Bearer Capability of the trunk or dial service you are attempting to connect to does not match your station’s COS.

If your station’s COS is set to ISDN only and call attempts are made through a trunk group not defined as ISDN only.

In certain systems if no trunk is available the call may be held in a queue and this displays the number of the queue.

Operating the Phone

Making External Calls

40 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Message

CO DISC./USER BUSY:

ON HOOK BY/NORMAL

CLEAR:

CO DISC./CALL REJECTED:

CO DISC./CAUSE #:

Definition

The party called is engaged.

The called party has hung up (on hook, idle).

The call cannot be completed because the called party does not allow it.

ISDN protocols define error messages, with codes indicating the cause of failed connections. See

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers on page 259

.

Operating the Phone

Making External Calls

41 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Upon Hearing Ringback Tone

After dialing an external destination number, the following features appear on your phone display when you hear the ringback tone. Wait for an answer or press one of the soft keys to activate the required feature.

OUT trunk line

DIAL outside telephone number

↓→ Msg.

Camp Mute Elps

[Msg.]

or MSG Leave Message is used when dialing a network destination.

If no one answers your call, use this feature to leave a “message” at the called party’s station. This feature lights the message lamp at the called party’s station indicating that a message was left, and a simple message such as CALL SUSAN is left on the destination station’s keyset display. See

Messages: Options on page 141

.

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during ringback so that when the call is answered your side of the conversation is muted and the called party will not hear you. When this feature is activated by the

[Mute]

or MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone.

(see

Mute Microphone on page 155)

.

[ARdl]

[Elps]

Auto Redial is used to have the system automatically redial the unanswered destination. Further redial

options are available after activation (see

Redial on page 179)

.

1. Press

[ARdl]

. The system will now automatically redial at timed intervals.

2. When the called party answers, press the flashing

SPKR

key or lift the handset to enable conversation.

Elapsed Time - not used during ringback.

[Wait]

Calls Waiting is used to view the number of calls waiting for you. See

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups on page 59

.

Operating the Phone

Making External Calls

42 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Flsh]

[Num]

[Park]

[Stop]

[OCC]

[Ser]

[Camp]

Flash on Trunk is used to send a signal through the system to trunk lines in order to operate certain types of features that are available on the second system. The second system is a telephone switching center, PABX or another Coral system. This feature is also known as Calibrated Opening.

Number is used to briefly display the trunk dial number instead of the name.

Not used during ringback.

Stop Dialing is not used during ringback. Press this key before you hear ringback tone, in order to notify the system when dialing out has been completed. In response the system sends your call immediately towards the destination without waiting inter-digit time out.

OCC is used for users connected with pulse trunks and/or for when your phone is defined with Auto

Transfer. This feature enables you to send touch-tone dialing (DTMF tones) over non-DTMF trunks or stations for applications or services (such as Voice Mail) requiring DTMF tones. See

Touch-Tone Dialing

(DTMF) for Other Common Carriers (OCC) on page 196

.

Not used during ringback.

Camp On, also known as Call Back. When a network station does not answer, you may request that the system automatically call you back when the required destination number is available. See

Calls Waiting:

Receiving on page 82

.

Operating the Phone

Making External Calls

43 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Upon Hearing Busy Tone

After dialing an external destination, the following features appear on your phone display when you hear a busy tone. Hang up and dial later or press the nearby soft key to activate the required feature.

OUT

USER BUSY

↓→ Msg.

trunk line

Camp Mute Elps

[Msg.]

or MSG Leave Message is used when dialing network destinations and not external destinations.

Use this feature to leave a “message” at a busy station. This feature lights the message waiting lamp at the called party’s station indicating that a message was left, and it leaves a simple message such as CALL

SUSAN

on the destination station’s keyset display. See

Messages: Options on page 141

.

[Camp]

Camp On, also known as Call Back. Used only when dialing network destinations and not external destinations. When the network station is busy, you may request that the system automatically call you back when the required destination number is available. See

Calls Waiting: Receiving on page 82

.

[ARdl]

[Save]

Auto Redial is used to have the system automatically redial the unanswered destination. Further redial

options are available after activation (see

Redial on page 179)

.

Save Number is used to save the dial number of the busy destination. The saved number can then be redialed by pressing

[Redl] [Save]

from idle (see

Redial on page 179)

.

NOTE! The saved number will remain in memory until another number is saved by repeating the above procedure.

Operating the Phone

Making External Calls

44 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

During a Call

The following features are available during an external call:

EXT ANS trunk line

DIAL outside telephone number

↓→ PgQ

Xfer Hold Mute

[PgQ]

[Xfer]

Page Queue places your call on hold by sending it to one of ten Page Queue destinations. You are then free to page all the system members from your phone and announce that there is a call for Mr. Doe on a specific Page

Queue Line. The call can be picked up from any system station. See

Page Queue on page 156

.

Transfer passes your call to another destination. Pressing

[Xfer] places the called party on hold. Dial a number

(internal or external). Disconnect to transfer the call, or first announce the call and then disconnect. See

Transfer (Xfer) on page 197

.

[ARdl]

Auto Redial is used for outgoing calls only. Use Auto Redial to have the system automatically redial the

unanswered destination. Further redial options are available after activation. See

Redial on page 179

.

Hold places the active call on hold. See

Hold on page 132

.

[Hold]

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during a conversation to mute your side of the conversation (handset, headset and speakerphone). When this feature is activated by the

[Mute]

or MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your

speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone.

(see

Mute

Microphone on page 155)

.

[Elps]

Elapsed Time toggle feature is used to view or cancel the call duration in HH:MM:SS format up to 13 hours

(12:59:59). See

Setup on page 238

.

Operating the Phone

Making External Calls

45 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Ser]

[ActC]

[Priv]

[eHld]

[Save]

[Park]

[Wait]

[Flsh]

[Num]

[OCC]

Save Number is used to save the dial number of the called external destination. The saved number can then be redialed by pressing

[Redl] [Save]

from idle (see

Redial on page 179)

.

NOTE! The saved number will remain in memory until another number is saved by repeating the above.

Park your call at your station so that you can pick it up at another system station. See

Park on page 164

.

Calls Waiting is used to view the number of calls waiting for you during a conversation.

Flash on Trunk is used to send a signal through the system to trunk lines in order to operate certain types of features that are available on the second system. The second system is a telephone switching center, PABX or another Coral system. This feature is also known as Calibrated Opening.

Number is used to briefly display the trunk dial number instead of the name.

OCC is used for users connected with pulse trunks and/or when your phone is defined with Auto Transfer.

This feature enables you to send touch-tone dialing (DTMF tones) over non-DTMF trunks and stations6 for applications or services (such as Voice Mail) requiring DTMF tones. See

Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) for

Other Common Carriers (OCC) on page 196

.

Series is used to mark an external call before transferring it to a third party. This causes the call to return to you after the third party hangs up. This feature can only be used during conversation.

Account Code is used to enter an account code for the current external call. The code is marked on the

SMDR printout. See

Account Code on page 57

.

Privacy puts your phone into Privacy mode. This prevents other members of your Boss Group or ELA

Group from accidentally joining your conversations.

Exclusive Hold puts your phone into Exclusive Hold mode. This ensures that a call placed on hold can be retrieved only at your station. If Exclusive Hold is cancelled, the call put on hold can be retrieved by any other member of your Boss Group or ELA Group.

Operating the Phone

Making External Calls

46 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Receiving and Answering Calls

There are several ways to answer calls. Answer the call directly by using the conventional methods such as pressing the flashing

SPKR

key, lifting the handset or pressing any flashing key (DSS, LOOP, Line, etc). Other options include using one of the state-related Coral system telephony features before you answer or diverting the unanswered call. The state related features automatically appear, as shown in the display below:

The caller ID is displayed on the top line.

NOTE! If caller ID has been blocked (see Caller ID Control on page 81)

, the # RESTRICTED message for incoming internal calls or # UNAVA message for incoming external calls appears on the top line instead.

caller #

↓→ DND

Mute FwdA Num

[DND]

[FwdA]

Do Not Disturb is used to send a reorder (busy) tone to the incoming call, thus avoiding answering the call.

Once DND is activated, all incoming calls will receive reorder tones. See

Do Not Disturb (DND) on page 101

.

[Mute]

or MUTE Mute can be activated during ringing (before answering) so that when the call is answered your side of the conversation is muted, and the caller will not hear you. When this feature is activated by the

[Mute]

or MUTE on/off toggle switch, a bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red. The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to

reactivate the microphone.

(see

Mute Microphone on page 155)

.

Call Forward All. Use this feature to forward all incoming calls to another destination. To operate, press

[FwdA]

when your phone is ringing and select the destination. See

Call Forwarding / Follow Me on page 73

.

Operating the Phone

Receiving and Answering Calls

47 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[eAll]

[Num]

[Wait]

Tip:

Call Forward All External. Relevant for external calls only. Use this feature to forward all incoming external calls to another destination. To operate, press

[eAll]

when your phone is ringing and select the destination. See

Call Forwarding / Follow Me on page 73

.

Number is used to briefly display the caller’s dial number instead of the name.

Calls Waiting is used to view the number of calls waiting for you (including this incoming call).

See

Divert Call on page 100 . Divert is used to divert an incoming call to another system station,

group or Library number. Press a preprogrammed DIVERT CALL to XXXX key.

Operating the Phone

Receiving and Answering Calls

48 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

During Idle

The following telephony features appear by default on the third line of your phone display during idle. Alternatively, they can be reached by pressing and holding (for at least three seconds) OK until the Main Main appears, and then choosing Features .

Tip:

Features and their locations in the idle state may be redefined to suit changing working stations or adapted to your individual requirements by your system administrator. Not every feature in this guide may have been installed in your system, or at your extension. Check with your system administrator for a list of the specific features installed.

↓→ Msg

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

Log Dir Fwd

Main Menu:

Sysdef

Features

Esc

Main Menu:

Features

Sysdef

Userdef

Esc

T207M & T207M/NP Features Menu T208M & T208M/BL Features Menu

Operating the Phone

During Idle

49 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Msg]

[Log]

[Dir]

[Fwd]

[DND]

[FlxC]

[Redl]

[PgQ]

[Hold]

[Remd]

[PkUp]

[Camp]

[Park]

[VPg]

Message is used to view, answer and delete messages, or to leave a message at another system station or at a

network number. See

Messages: Options on page 141

.

Call Log allows you to view and redial themost recent incoming/ outgoing calls. See

Call Log on page 77

.

Directory provides you with a searchable directory listing. Both Shared and Personal records are combined

and organized alphabetically, for easy retrieval. See

Directory on page 94

.

Call Forward enables you to define the conditions under which incoming calls to your station are forwarded

to another destination. See

Call Forwarding / Follow Me on page 73

.

Do Not Disturb is used to block all incoming calls to your station. See

Do Not Disturb (DND) on page 101

.

FlexiCall allows you to set a telephone located outside the enterprise as your phone’s double. Use this feature to edit FlexiCall options. See

FlexiCall on page 111

.

Redial is used to redial the last dialed number, or a number that has been saved. See

Redial on page 179

.

Page Queue retrieves a held Page Queue call. A Page Queue call can be picked up from any system station.

See

Page Queue on page 156

.

Hold retrieves a call from hold. See

Hold on page 132

.

Reminder is used to set, review, or cancel reminders, which will ring your phone at a designated time. More than one reminder can be programmed. See

Reminder on page 183

.

Call Pickup enables you to pickup another ringing station in your system. See

Call Pickup on page 80

.

Camp On, also known as Call Back. When a network station is busy or does not answer, you may request

that the system automatically call you back when the required destination number is available. See

page 84

.

Park. When a call is parked at your station,

[Park]

appears with a bullet to the left. Use this function to retrieve the call. See

Park on page 164

.

Voice Page is used to call another keyset station. The called keyset station will automatically answer the voice page, acting in a similar manner to an intercom. See

Paging: Voice Paging on page 161

.

Operating the Phone

During Idle

50 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[WPg]

[SM]

[ActC]

[CID]

[Wake]

[aWk]

[CIns]

[GpCl]

[ACD]

[Lock]

[Exec]

[COS]

Whisper Page is used to quietly page one party of a two party call. The other party does not hear the whisper page. See

Whisper Paging on page 207

.

Silent Monitor enables an authorized (COS and AUTHORIZATION) user to monitor any port, station or

trunk (except conference), without warning to the monitored party. See

Silent Monitoring on page 188

.

Account Code is used to mark an external call (incoming or outgoing) with an account code, which can be used for later reference/billing. Used to enter an account code for the current external call.. See

Account Code on page 57

.

Caller ID Control overrides the system-defined caller ID defaults when making external calls (as well as internal calls, depending on system-wide settings). Thus, if your ID is sent by default when calling external numbers, selecting this will block the number, and vice versa. See

Caller ID Control on page 81

.

Wake Up is used to set, review, or cancel wakeup calls which will ring your phone at a designated time.

Wakeup on page 205

Attendant WakeUp is relevant for Attendant Console only. Press

[aWk]

to access the attendant wakeup options. See

WakeUp on page 220

.

Conference Inspect allows you to release a conference participant from an ongoing conference. You may also view the participant list. See

Conference Calls: Conference View/Release on page 92

.

Group Calls is used to activate Group Call Conference features. See

Group Calls on page 117

.

ACD/UCD Options is used to activate ACD/UCD features for Call Center or Hunt group agents. See

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups on page 59

.

Phone Lock is used to prevent unauthorized persons from using your phone line. Incoming calls may still be

answered. See

Phone Lock on page 166

.

Executive Privilege is used to copy all the COS features from any system station to your telephone, in order

to use features or to dial numbers restricted to the current station. See

Executive Privilege on page 110

.

COS Switchover is used to change your Class of Service from Primary to Secondary or vice versa. Different

COS give different dial and feature capabilities to a particular station. See

COS Switchover on page 93

.

Operating the Phone

During Idle

51 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Chrg]

[sSet]

[tSet]

[Sys]

[fSet]

[Trc]

[aTrc]

[Room]

[aRS]

[bFwd]

[aFwd]

Setup is used to program your station for specific feature activation. See

Setup on page 238

.

Malicious Call Trace is used to record the next x (a system-defined variable) calls to your phone. A list of

these calls can be sent to a printer or terminal. See

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom on page 133

.

Attendant Call Trace is relevant for Attendant Console only. Use Attendant Malicious Call Trace to set or

print a call trace for any station. See

Malicious Call Trace on page 217

.

Room Status (or Canned Messages) is used to toggle the room status definition (or canned message) of your station on or off. See

Room Status on page 185

or

Canned Messages on page 87

.

Attendant Room Status (or Attendant Canned Messages) is relevant for Attendant Console only. Use the

Attendant Room Status feature to toggle the room status definition (or canned message) of any station on or

off. See

Room Status on page 218

or

Canned Messages on page 214

.

Boss Group: Call Forward enables you to define the conditions under which incoming calls to your Boss

Group are forwarded to another destination. See

Boss Groups: Call Forwarding on page 71

.

Attendant Call Forward is relevant for Attendant Console only. Used by the attendant to program stations, boss groups and ACD/UCD groups so that incoming calls ring at another destination. See

Call Forward on page 212

.

Call Charge is relevant for Attendant Console only. This attendant feature shows the charges accumulated

per station. The attendant may reset and print the Charge Table content. See

Call Charge on page 222

.

Station Setup is relevant for Attendant Console only. Station Setup allows the attendant to define stations for

specific feature activation. See

Station Setup Features on page 224

.

Trunk Setup is relevant for Attendant Console only. Trunk Setup allows the attendant to define trunks for

specific feature activation. See

Trunk Setup Features on page 233

.

System Setup is relevant for Attendant Console only. System features (time, public library, etc) can be edited from this menu. See

System Features on page 227

.

Operating the Phone

During Idle

52 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Return Calls

Options

This class of calls typically indicates Return calls from busy or no answer stations, user errors, system errors or messages that are sent back to the attendant after an operation has succeeded or failed. Calls that are returned to the attendant generally require additional operations. To help you identify the type of return call that is pending, accompanying detailed messages are also shown on the console display.

Use the following guide to navigate through this topic:

Attendant: Intercepted Calls

.........................................................page 54

Attendant: Message Waiting Delivery

........................................page 143

Attendant: Ports Without Disconnect Supervision

.......................page 55

Attendant: WakeUp Fail

.............................................................page 220

Hold Return

................................................................................page 132

Message Delivery

.......................................................................page 142

Page Queue Return

.....................................................................page 156

Parked Call Return

.....................................................................page 164

Reminder Rings

...........................................................................page 183

Series Call Return

.......................................................................page 187

Transfer is not Completed

...........................................................page 198

WakeUp Rings

.............................................................................page 220

Operating the Phone

Return Calls

53 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Intercepted Calls (Attendant Station)

The attendant may be called upon to assist with intercepted calls to a station. A station’s call could be intercepted for the following reasons:

Dial Fail: Incomplete number dialed.

COS Fail: Class of Service denies the use of a certain feature.

Toll Barrier: Block on certain external numbers.

Undefined Destination: The destination is not recognized by the system.

Passcode Fail: Illegal Account Code. VFAC number is not recognized by the system.

INTCPT caller # COS #

DIAL/COS/T-BAR/UNDEFINED/FAIL dialed #

↓→ DND

Mute FwdA eAll

Answering Intercept:

1. Answer the call. The intercepted caller number and its COS number are displayed on the first line of the display. The second system line displays a written fail message and the dialed number, feature code or outgoing destination number.

2. Ask the caller for the dialed number. If the number is incorrect or a denied feature, the attendant can transfer the call to another destination.

Operating the Phone

Return Calls

54 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Ports Without Disconnect Supervision (Attendant Station)

When two Ports Without Disconnect Supervision (PWDS) are connected, the length of conversation allowed is predetermined. The attendant is called from time to time to control the connection.

PWDS CALL your # party #1 PWDS party #2

↓→ DND

Mute FwdA

Your phone rings

eAll

BTO party #1 party #

↓→ Xfer

Mute fRls Dest

Connected parties hear break-in warning tone

Answering return calls – PWDS:

1. Answer the call.

2. The connected parties hear break-in warning tone.

3. Listen for conversation.

4. If the conversation has ended, press

[fRls]

(Forced Release).

Otherwise, press

SPKR

to continue the call for another period of time.

Operating the Phone

Return Calls

55 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Station Telephony Features

Overview

The following pages detail the rich array of Coral system telephony features available on your phone. Features are accessed by use of the context-sensitive soft keys for ease of use, providing you with a wealth of functionality within easy grasp.

The features can also be operated by using their system dial codes so that they may be programmed into the programmable keys. For more detailed information on feature default dial codes, see

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes on page 267

.

Any feature can be programmed into a programmable key by using its feature code and any required destination number. For example, you may want to program a CALL FWD SUSAN key that automatically forwards all your calls to Susan (see

page 167

for instructions on how to program a feature key).

This section is organized alphabetically, on a feature-by-feature basis. Use of this guide is straightforward, with each feature listed separately. However, certain features have various user options. In this case, all of the options are listed under the major feature name; examples of this are ACD & UCD Groups, Boss Groups, ELA Groups and Group Calls.

NOTE! The following pages list the features that are available on your phone. Not every feature in this list may have been installed in your system, or at your station/extension. Features are dependent on the assigned Class of Service (COS) levels and some features may require a later Coral software version. Check with your system administrator for a list of the specific features installed.

Station Telephony Features

Overview

56 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Account Code

An account code can be entered before or during an external (incoming or outgoing) call, causing the call to be marked with the account code on the SMDR (Station Message Detailed Records) printout.

Depending upon your system definition, up to 16 digits are available for account numbers. Only one account number entry is allowed for a single call. Any additional number show the message “ALREADY SET”. Should you dial a wrong account number (when VFAC is installed in your system), the error message “PASSCODE FAIL” appears.

Select

[ActC]

and enter the Account Code.

Page 1

→ VPg

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

WPg SM

[ActC]

Page 2

ENTER ACCOUNT #

ACCOUNT NUMBER

∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗ Enter Destination ∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗

Station Telephony Features

Account Code

57 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Activating during external call:

1. Select

[ActC]

.

2. Dial the relevant account number.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

4. Continue with the call or hang-up.

NOTE! Last Number Redial code, Saved Number code or Speed Number can also be used instead of an outside line where applicable.

Activating from idle:

1. Select

[ActC]

.

2. Enter the relevant account number or press the outside line key.

3. Enter the external line access code.

4. Dial the external number.

5. Continue with the call.

Forced Account Code:

In some cases (as defined by Class of Service) dialing must begin with a Forced Account code before the called number can be dialed. When Forced Account code is required, the distinctive dial tone will be heard after dialing the external line code,

and the ENTER ACCOUNT # message appears on the top line. See

Making External Calls on page 40

.

Station Telephony Features

Account Code

58 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups

An ACD/UCD group is a number of stations operating together for the purpose of automatic call distribution. The ACD/UCD groups form the building blocks for modern call centers. The Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution Systems improve incoming call handling by queuing and routing callers. They are used in businesses handling a large volume of incoming calls. ACD/UCD systems prevent incoming callers from receiving busy tones. They encourage callers to wait rather than ring elsewhere.

The incoming calls are distributed among a group of agents. Agents can log in or out of the group. When all lines are in use, an announcement plays for callers waiting in queue. If the queue is full, calls are routed to a predetermined telephone number.

Calls incoming to an ACD/UCD group are answered by free agents, according to system wide defined rules. The most commonly used rule by an ACD is for the longest waiting call to be answered by the agent who has been waiting for a call for the longest period of time. UCD groups do not provide call distribution to the longest waiting staff. The UCD system automatically delivers each incoming call to the next available agent's line.

Select

[ACD]

to access the ACD and UCD options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ GpCl

[ACD]

Lock Exec

Page 2

ACD & UCD Hunt Groups

↓→ Wait

ID LogI pLog

Station Telephony Features

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups

59 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Wait]

[ID]

[LogI]

Calls Waiting provides you with the ability to view the number of calls waiting for any ACD group. To view the number of waiting calls, press

[Wait]

, and enter the ACD group number at the prompt.

Alternatively, if the Calls Waiting ACD# programmable key for your group is flashing, view the number of waiting calls for your group (even during a call) by simply pressing the key. The number of waiting calls is displayed on the top line.

To program a Calls Waiting ACD# key, see page 167

.

Load ID is used to load your ID into the system, identifying you as an ACD agent. A bullet appears next to

[ID]

to indicate your ID is loaded.

Once registered within the system, you may join as many ACD Groups as required. Your ID remains in the system provided you remain logged into at least one ACD Group. You may load a different ID number while logged in, which will override the previous ID.

1. Press

[ID]

. Your current ID number appears on the display.

2. Enter your ID number at the prompt (four digits).

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Log In/Out enables you to join or leave an ACD Group. You may belong to more than one group simultaneously. To join an ACD group:

1. Press

[LogI]

.

2. Dial the ACD group. The ID number is displayed on the middle line.

3. Choose

[Set]

to join the group or [Canc] to leave the group.

4. Listen for the confirmation tone. The ASSIGN message indicates that you are logged in, while the DE-

ASSIGN

message on the top line indicates you are logged out.

5. If you have not loaded your ACD four-digit ID number, the NO ID, LOGIN message appears. In this instance, load your ID number and restart the login process.

6. To join additional groups, repeat Steps

1

-

4

.

7. If you are a member of more than one ACD group, use the Primary Login feature (see below) to define one of those groups as your primary group.

Station Telephony Features

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups

60 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[pLog]

[R/R]

[rUCD]

Primary Login Group. If you are a member of more than one ACD group, you can use this feature to define one of those groups as your primary group. Once you have logged into your primary group, waiting calls will always be routed to you from this group first.

1. Press

[pLog]

.

2. Dial the primary ACD group number.

3. Choose

[Set]

to join the group or [Canc] to leave the group.

4. If you have not loaded your ACD four-digit ID number, the NO ID, LOGIN message appears. Load your ID number.

If this feature is activated, a bullet appears next to

[pLog]

.

NOTE! If no group is defined as primary or if log out is defined for the primary group, then the first group you logged into (previous page) is defined as primary by system.

Release/Resume. Press

[R/R]

to temporarily leave all the ACD/UCD groups of which you are a member. Press again to rejoin your group/s. When released a bullet appears next to

[R/R]

.

The top line will show RELEASED ALL when you leave your group/s and RESUMED ALL when you rejoin.

You will be automatically released from all groups of which you are a member if you do not answer a call within a predetermined time (defined system-wide).

Release UCD is used to temporarily exit (or rejoin) the UCD group of which you are a member.

1. Press

[rUCD]

.

2. Dial your UCD Hunt group number.

3. Press

[Set]

to exit or [Canc] to rejoin.

4. Listen for the confirmation tone.

NOTE! You can preprogram a feature key for use as a toggle key. To program a Release/Resume UCD# key, use feature code #1991 followed by the specific UCD group number.

Station Telephony Features

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups

61 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[WrpT]

[WrpC]

Wrap Time is used to provide an idle ACD/UCD group member with a time-out period between consecutive group calls. The time-out period is determined for each group on a system-wide basis. This feature allows the agent to utilize the wrap-up code without interference from outside calls.

1. Press

[WrpT]

.

WRAP-UP ON

appears on the system display line and a bullet appears next to

[WrpT]

.

2. Press

[WrpT]

again to end the Wrap-Up time interval.

WRAP-UP OFF

appears on the system display line.

Wrap Code is used to send the appropriate wrap-up code for the last incoming ACD call you answered. See your ACD Supervisor for an updated list of codes.

1. Press

[WrpC]

.

2. Dial the appropriate four-digit code number.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

[Busy]

Busy ACD Group, an Attendant feature, enables the attendant to define the maximum number of calls that can be placed in a waiting queue for any ACD group. Once this number is reached, additional calls arriving at the ACD group will hear the busy tone.

1. Press

[Busy]

.

2. Dial an ACD group number.

[Next] and [Prev] appear, which can also be used to scroll between groups.

3. Choose

[Chrg]

(change call number) to change the maximum number of callers that will hear the busy tone.

4. Enter a three-digit number with leading zeros, up to 254 (e.g. 023 for 23).

5. Choose [Canc] to delete the limitation.

6. Press

[Exit]

to terminate.

[Move]

Auto Set Relocate (move station) is designed for use as hot seat-feature in call center environments, allowing you to

move your station and all your station’s predefined features to a new location. See

Auto Set Relocate on page 64

.

Station Telephony Features

ACD and UCD Hunt Groups

62 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Activation Code

Use the Activation code (default code: #11, #

>

1, or

>

1) as required when programming features.

The following symbol in this manual indicates an activation code:

9

See your system manager, as to which activation code is used in your system. The activation code can be entered by dialing or programming a key with the code, or adding the code to the program of a feature key.

Station Telephony Features

Activation Code

63 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

.

Auto Set Relocate

Auto Set Relocate enables you to transfer your station and all your station’s predefined features to a new location, thus sparing you the inconvenience of having to re-enter all the stored speed numbers and to reset previously defined features at your new permanent or temporary location. This feature enables you to use any phone available from your Coral system while keeping your unique extension dial number. Phones are defined to have either the Permanent (see

page 65

) or Temporary (see

page 66

) Auto Set Relocate feature enabled. Before activating this feature, contact your system administrator to determine

what your Auto Set Relocate setting is. If you are defined as permanent, you will not be able to use temporary (unless redefined by your system administrator), and vice versa.

NOTE! When invoking the Auto Set Relocate feature, incorrect information may be sent to the local

Emergency or E911 Center. Before activating this feature, contact your local administrator to ensure that your new and current system profiles are compatible with the E911 Center.

Auto Set Relocate is accessed by selecting

[fSet] [Move]

from the idle screen.

Page 1

↑→ COS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[fSet]

Trc Room

Page 2

Feature Setup

↑→ wDND

Priv eHld

[Move]

Page 3

RELOCATE

ENTER SOURCE NO.

Station Telephony Features

Auto Set Relocate

64 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Auto Set Relocate: Permanent

When defined for permanent relocation, this feature enables you to swap phones within the same Coral system by assigning one phone the profile of the other phone, and vice versa. All the phones' properties, numbering, programmable keys, membership in groups, etc. are automatically exchanged. This feature facilitates the phone relocation procedure, eliminating the need for traditional phone moves that involve physical disconnection of the station wires and reconnection at another location. Both source and destination phones (see figure below) should be T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL phones. The Auto Set Relocate is activated at the destination station. The phone swap holds until a reverse swap is performed.

Activating from the Destination (new) location

1. Select

[fSet] [Move]

or

[ACD] [Move]

.

2. Dial your (source) station number.

3. Enter your (source) passcode (four digits).

4. Dial the activation code

9

.

5. The station now initializes with the source profile.

Destination

Station

Reversing from the Source (original) location

Repeat the above procedure from your original source location.

1. Auto Set Relocate

activation from the

Destination station

2. Source station's

passcode to be

entered

Source

Station

(Passcode)

Swapping:

- Dial Number

- Keyset Definition

- COS

- Programmable keys

- Private Library

- Message indication

- Group membership

- Personal Directory

Station Telephony Features

Auto Set Relocate: Permanent

65 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Auto Set Relocate: Temporary

When defined for temporary relocation, this feature allows a temporary move of your extension from one location to another, while preserving your extension's original setup. The Auto Set Relocate function enables you to access customized features of your phone from another phone. By activating the feature you can relocate all of your (source) phone's programmable keys, numbering, membership in groups, etc. to another (destination) phone located elsewhere within the same Coral system. As this takes place, the source phone acquires the full profile of the destination phone, and vice versa.

The Auto Set Relocate is activated at the destination station. The temporary phone swap is automatically reversed at midnight. Reactivating Auto Set Relocate at the already swapped destination station causes:

• Automatic cancellation of the first relocation

• Exchange of the new (third user's) phone profile with the destination phone profile

Activating from the Destination (new) location:

1. Select

[fSet] [Move]

or

[ACD] [Move]

.

2. Dial your (source) station number.

3. Enter your (source) passcode (four digits).

4. Dial the activation code

9

.

5. The station now initializes with the source profile.

Canceling from the Destination (new) location:

1. Select

[fSet] [Move]

or

[ACD] [Move]

.

2. Dial your (source) station number.

3. Enter your (source) passcode (four digits).

4. To cancel, dial the cancellation code

8

.

5. The station now initializes with its original profile.

Station Telephony Features

Auto Set Relocate: Temporary

66 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Boss Groups

A Boss Group is a number of stations operating together in which the individual stations may or may not simultaneously ring, as defined by the system per Boss Group.

Members of a Boss group share a

LINE

key which functions very much like a common line among keysets. The appropriate

LINE

key flashes at all stations when a call arrives and can then be answered by any group member.

Calls directed to a Boss Group ring at all members assigned to ring within the group, then may be directed to any members that are assigned to ring after a delay (ring delay after time-out).

When set to ring at a specific station, the call can be either transferred to any group member or picked up by any group member when the original group member is not in exclusive hold. Any group member can join a conversation for ‘1A2’ or 3way conversation by pressing the appropriate illuminated

LINE

key, but only when the original group member is not in

Privacy mode. Additional members can join to make a 4-way conversation when allowed system-wide, and none of the three participants have Privacy on.

To program a line key, see

page 167

.

The maximum number of lines available for your group is defined on a per group basis.

Use the following guide to navigate through this section:

Boss Groups: Using

......................................................................page 68

Boss Groups: Privacy

...................................................................page 69

Boss Groups: Exclusive Hold

.......................................................page 70

Boss Groups: Call Forwarding

......................................................page 71

Station Telephony Features

Boss Groups

67 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Boss Groups: Using

Making calls:

1. Press a free

LINE

key.

2. Dial the required number.

NOTE! The line key LED of all group members changes from off to steady on.

Receiving calls:

When the line flashes (note that the telephone may also ring):

1. Press the flashing

LINE

key or, if phone rings, lift the handset.

2. Answer the call.

NOTE! The line key LED of all group members now changes from flashing to steady on.

Joining a group conversation (1A2 type):

You can join any group conversation when a

LINE

key is lit, with two exceptions:

• When the member’s station is set to privacy, in which case the message PRIVACY is displayed and a reorder tone is heard, or

• When another member has already joined the conversation and the group is not defined for four members, in which case the message ILLEGAL is displayed and a reorder tone is heard.

To join the group conversation, press the lit

LINE

key.

Station Telephony Features

Boss Groups: Using

68 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Boss Groups: Privacy

As a Boss Group member you can put your telephone into Privacy mode. This prevents other phone stations within your Boss

Group from accidentally joining your conversations.

The feature can be utilized for a specific call or for all calls.

Operating Privacy for all calls

To operate this feature for all calls, see

page 245

.

Operating Privacy for current call

You may override the station Privacy setting on a call-by-call basis. Thus, if your station is in Privacy mode, you may remove the Privacy restriction and allow others to join your conversation; alternatively if your station is not in Privacy mode, you may apply Privacy to a specific call.

This is done by pressing

[Priv]

during a call. Press this key to toggle the feature on and off. This key can be pressed as many times as necessary.

Once Privacy is defined for your station (all calls) the Privacy key LED remains illuminated, and a bullet is displayed next to

[Priv]

, even if the key is pressed to temporarily override the Privacy feature. However, when your call is completed the telephone will return to the permanent status, private or non-private, as previously defined for all calls.

Station Telephony Features

Boss Groups: Privacy

69 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Boss Groups: Exclusive Hold

As a Boss Group member, you can put your telephone into Exclusive Hold mode. This ensures that a call you place on hold can be retrieved only at the station where Exclusive Hold was originally placed. If Exclusive Hold is cancelled, the call put on hold can be retrieved by any other member of your Boss Group, by pressing the flashing

LINE

key. The feature can be utilized for a specific call or for all calls.

Operating Exclusive Hold for all calls

To operate this feature for all calls, see

page 245

.

Operating Exclusive Hold for current call

You may override the station Exclusive Hold setting on a call-by-call basis. Thus, if your station is in Exclusive Hold mode, you may remove the Exclusive Hold restriction and allow others to pick up your held call; alternatively if your station is not in Exclusive Hold mode, you may apply Exclusive Hold to a specific call. This is done by pressing

[eHld]

during a call before pressing

HOLD

. Press this key to toggle the feature on and off. This key can be pressed as many times as necessary. If your telephone is not in Exclusive Hold mode for all calls, press

[eHld]

before you press

[Hold]

. Press

[Hold]

to place a call into

Exclusive Hold. The

LINE

on hold will remain steady on at all other phones, and the call will only be retrievable from your station.

Transferring call to a group member (during conversation):

Once Exclusive Hold is defined for your station (all calls) the Exclusive Hold key LED remains illuminated, and a bullet is displayed next to

[eHld]

, even if the key is pressed to temporarily override the Exclusive Hold feature. However, when your call is completed the telephone will return to the permanent status, as previously defined for all calls. If your telephone is in

Exclusive Hold mode for all calls, press

[eHld]

before you press

[Hold]

.

1. Press

[Hold]

. The

LINE

on hold will flash at all phones.

2. Listen for the confirmation tone.

3. Inform the party to whom you wish to transfer on which line the call is on hold.

Returning or picking up a call on hold:

Press the flashing

LINE

key.

Station Telephony Features

Boss Groups: Exclusive Hold

70 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Boss Groups: Call Forwarding

Calls arriving at your Boss Group can be forwarded, according to certain criteria, to ring at various destinations.

Calls incoming from an external source only can be forwarded using

[eAll]

,

[eBsy]

,

[eNA]

, and

[eTim]

. Additionally, calls from

Internal and External sources can be forwarded to different destinations, as described on

page 76

.

Possible destinations are operator, station/group, external number via public and private speed call library, DVMS prerecorded message, UNA/central bell, group call, or network number (and the Boss Group itself for external calls).

Boss Group Call Forwarding options are accessed by selecting

[bFwd]

from idle state.

Page 1

→ aRS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[bFwd] aFwd Chrg

Page 2

Boss Group: Call Forward

E=External

All eAll

•Busy •NA

[All]

or

[eAll]

Forward All. Forwards your incoming Boss Group calls to another destination. The destination can call back or return calls to your group, and outgoing calls can still be placed from within the group.

[Busy]

or

[eBsy]

Forward Busy. Forwards your incoming Boss Group calls to another destination when your Boss Group lines are all busy.

[NA] or

[eNA]

Forward No Answer. Forwards your incoming Boss Group calls to another destination when none of your

Boss Group lines are being answered.

[Time]

or

[eTim]

Forward Timed. Forwards your incoming Boss Group calls to another destination during specific, systemdefined time periods. See table on

page 74

.

Station Telephony Features

Boss Groups: Call Forwarding

71 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Operating Boss Group: Call Forward:

1. Select

[bFwd]

.

2. Press the required forwarding option (

[All]

,

[eAll]

,

[

Busy

]

,

[eBsy]

,

[NA]

,

[eNA]

,

[

Time

]

,

[eTim]

).

3. Press

[sGp#]

and dial your boss group number, OR

Scroll between groups by using

[p-Up]

,

[f-Up]

,

[p-Dn]

and

[f-Dn]

.

4. To set Call Forward, choose

[Dest]

and dial the destination number to which calls are to be forwarded, OR

To cancel Call Forward, choose [Canc].

5. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit and save.

Station Telephony Features

Boss Groups: Call Forwarding

72 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Call Forwarding / Follow Me

Calls arriving at your station can be forwarded to ring at various destinations, depending on the state of the terminal (all, busy, no answer, timed). In addition to the forwarding options detailed above, your phone can distinguish between calls arriving from an internal or external source when forwarding.

Calls incoming from an external source only can be forwarded using

[eAll]

,

[eBsy]

,

[eNA]

, and

[eTim]

. Additionally, calls from

Internal and External sources can be forwarded to different destinations, as described on

page 76

. Possible destinations are

operator, station/group, external number via public and private speed call library, DVMS pre-recorded message, UNA/central bell, group call, or network number (and the station itself for external calls).

A bullet appears next to any active forwarding feature on the Forwarding Options screen (page 2 below), and an additional bullet appears next to [Fwd] on the idle screen (Page 1 below).

Forwarding options are accessed by pressing

[Fwd]

from idle state.

Page 1

↓→ Msg

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

Log Dir

[Fwd]

Page 2

Call Forwarding

E=External BNA=BusyNoAns

↓→ FwdA eAll

•Busy eBsy

Station Telephony Features

Call Forwarding / Follow Me

73 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[FwdA] or

[eAll]

Forward All. Forwards your incoming calls to another destination. The destination can call back or return calls to your terminal, and you can still place outgoing calls from your terminal.

If

[FwdA]

or

[eAll]

is activated, a *FwdAll* message appears on the top line to remind you that this feature has

been activated at your station, and the Distinctive Dial Tone sounds upon lifting your handset (see

Appendix

B: Tones on page 255

).

NOTE! Call Forward All activation is also available during an incoming call (when ringing). See

below .

[Busy]

or

[eBsy]

Forward Busy. Forwards your incoming calls to another destination when your terminal is busy.

[NA] or

[eNA]

Forward No Answer. Forwards your incoming calls to another destination when you do not answer within a system-defined number of rings.

[BNA]

or

[eBNA]

Forward Busy/No Answer. Forwards your incoming calls to another destination when your terminal is busy, or when you do not answer within a predetermined number of rings.

[BNA]

enables you to program

[Busy]

and

[NA]

in one action, while

[eBNA]

enables you to program

[eBsy]

and

[eNA]

in one action.

[Undf]

Undefined. Forwards your incoming calls to another destination when your station is unplugged or when your station has lost its Primary Call Agent because of network problems.

[Time]

or

[eTim]

Forward Timed. Forwards your incoming calls to another destination during specific, system-defined time periods. The system-defined time can include up to two separate time periods, for example, between 12:00pm and 12:30pm and between 6:00pm and 6:30pm your calls can be forwarded to the front desk.

Use the following table to document the system-defined time periods:

Time Period

1 st

2 nd

From To

Station Telephony Features

Call Forwarding / Follow Me

74 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Flw] or

[eFlw]

Follow Me. Allows you to collect your calls from another station. The source station is then put into a Call

Forward All state;

[FwdA]

or

[eAll]

respectively.

Operating Call Forward:

1. Choose the required forwarding option (

[FwdA]

,

[eAll]

,

[

Busy

]

,

[eBsy]

,

[NA]

,

[eNA]

,

[BNA]

,

[eBNA]

,

[Undf]

,

[

Time

]

,

[eTim]

).

2. You may scroll through the other forwarding options with [Next] and [Prev].

3. To set Call Forward, dial the destination number, OR

To cancel Call Forward, choose [Canc], OR

To change the Call Forward destination, choose

[Dest]

to enter destination and dial the destination number.

4. Listen for confirmation tone.

Operating Follow Me:

1. Choose

[Flw]

or

[eFlw]

from the location where you wish the calls to be forwarded.

2. Dial the number of your own (source) station (i.e. from which you wish to collect the calls).

A *FOLLOW ME source user name* message appears on the top line of your destination station.

3. To activate, choose

[Set]

.

OR

To cancel, choose [Canc].

4. Listen for confirmation tone.

Canceling Follow Me from the source location:

1. Choose

[FwdA]

or

[eAll]

from your own (source) station.

2. Choose [Canc].

3. Listen for confirmation tone.

Station Telephony Features

Call Forwarding / Follow Me

75 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Internal/External Call Forwarding

In addition to the forwarding options detailed above, your phone can distinguish between calls arriving from an internal or external source when forwarding. For each forwarding feature (forward all, when busy, on no answer, etc), you can program your phone to forward your calls as follows:

• Forward Internal and External calls to the same destination

• Forward Internal and External calls to different destinations

• Forward Internal calls only, while External calls keep ringing at your station

• Forward External calls only, while Internal calls keep ringing at your station

This is demonstrated in the following table using the

[FwdA]

and

[eAll]

feature as an example:

Case Forward Option

[FwdA]

Set To:

[eAll]

Set To:

1 Cancel (not set) and Cancel (not set)

2 Destination X and Cancel (not set)

3 Cancel (not set) and Destination Y

4 Destination X

5 Destination X and Destination Y and Destination Y

(programmed as

Your Station)

Resultant Call Destination

Internal Calls Go To External Calls Go To

Your Station

Destination X

Your Station

Destination X

Destination X

Your Station

Destination X

Destination Y

Destination Y

Your Station

Possible destinations for X are: operator, station/group, external number via public and private speed call library, DVMS prerecorded message, UNA/central bell, group call, or network number.

Possible destinations for Y are the same as for X, plus your own station number, thus facilitating forwarding of internal calls to another destination, whilst retaining external calls at your own station, as shown in Case 5 above.

Station Telephony Features

Call Forwarding / Follow Me

76 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Call Log

The Call Log feature allows you to view and redial the most recent outgoing and incoming calls to your station. (The maximum number of calls that can be stored in the log are determined by your type of phone and system setup, as defined by your system administrator.) Calls are displayed with the name and number (where available).

If the name is unavailable, just the number will be shown.

If the number is unavailable, the Call Log will display Unknown Number.

If the number is restricted, the Call Log will display Restricted Number.

If incoming calls are not answered, a message indicating the number of new calls is displayed on the phone idle screen:

< xx New Calls >

, where xx indicates the number of new calls. This count is reset to zero once the Call Log is viewed, and is not shown again until there are new calls logged.

Press

[Log]

to access the Call Log options. If no calls are logged for your station, the < No Calls Logged > message is displayed.

Page 1

↓→ Msg

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz

<02 New Calls>

[Log]

Dir Fwd

[Out]

[In]

Page 2

Call Log

Out

•In

Esc

Outgoing Call Log is used to view the most recent outgoing calls made from your station.

Incoming Call Log is used to view the most recent calls made to your station.

Station Telephony Features

Call Log

77 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

A bullet appears next to

[Out]

or

[In]

to indicate when outgoing or incoming calls are logged for your station. If no calls are logged, pressing

[Out]

or

[In]

displays the < No Calls Made > or < No Calls Received > message, respectively.

Page 3

In 10:00 29 May, 2006

↓√

01: Steve Williams 7652345 (xx)

Del Dial

•Num

OK

Use to scroll through the call records. The calls are listed in order of receipt/dialing, and are numbered accordingly at the left of the call display, with the most recent listed first. In the example above, 01: Steve Williams 7652345 indicates that Steve Williams was the most recent person to call/be called.

NOTE!

The maximum number of calls that can be stored in the log are determined by your type of phone and system setup, as defined by your system administrator.

Once this number is reached, any new calls added to the call log will result in the oldest record being deleted, on a first in, first out basis.

If an incoming call was originally answered, or has subsequently been dialed from the call log record, the ‘ √ ’ symbol appears to the left of the call display, as shown in the above example.

The keyset excludes duplicate numbers in the Call Log. A duplicate number is one that has called your station, or that has been called, more than once. Only the most recent call is displayed for each logged name/number. The number of times that they called is displayed in parentheses after the name and number, as shown in the diagram above. Once the Call Log has been viewed, this number resets to zero and is hidden.

Station Telephony Features

Call Log

78 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

The following options are available:

[Del]

Choose

[Del]

to delete the selected entry from the call log.

[Out]

[Name]

/

[Num]

Choose

[Out]

to dial the selected entry from the call log.

If the combined size of the logged name and number is larger than the display area (21 characters), the display shows only the name. An additional context-sensitive soft key is presented allowing you to toggle between viewing the number or the name. When a name is displayed, choose

[Num]

to view the dial number.

When a number is displayed, choose

[Name]

to view the name.

Station Telephony Features

Call Log

79 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Call Pickup

This feature enables you to pick up any ringing station or central bell within your system or pre-programmed Pickup Group.

Press

[PkUp]

to access the Pickup options.

Page 1

→ PgQ

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

Remd

[PkUp]

Camp

[Dest]

[Grp]

[Nite]

Page 2

Call Pickup

Dest Grp Nite

Direct Call Pickup (default dial number: #180 or 77) is used to answer any ringing station in your system. At the prompt, dial the number of the station that is ringing and answer the call.

Group Call Pickup (default dial number: #181 or 76) is used to answer any ringing station in your Pickup

Group. The call connects immediately upon pressing

[Grp]

.

NOTE! See your system administrator to define your own Pickup Group.

Night Call Pickup (default dial number: #192) is used to answer incoming calls after the attendant leaves or when a central bell is ringing. Normally this feature is activated for incoming calls during the night answering period. The call connects immediately upon pressing

[Nite]

.

Station Telephony Features

Call Pickup

80 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Caller ID Control

This feature allows you (from idle) to show or hide your phone number on the display of the called external party (as well as internal party, depending on system-wide settings). Your telephone is pre-set in the system to either restrict or display for all calls. Use

[CID]

to override this setting on a per-call basis (if permitted by COS).

Press

[CID]

to dial using Caller ID Control.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[CID]

Wake cIns GpCl

Page 2

DIAL

ID. RESTRICTED

***** Enter Destination ****

Operating Caller ID Control:

1. Press

[CID]

.

2. Dial the number.

3. Your call automatically connects. If your Coral system is set to restrict caller ID, it will now be presented to the called party, and vice versa.

NOTE! When you have a Caller ID programmed key, the LED is lit when Caller ID Control is restricted from your station.

Station Telephony Features

Caller ID Control

81 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Calls Waiting: Receiving

The call waiting tone, voice paging tone or muted ring indicates that another call is waiting for you to answer. When you hear this tone, or when the second row displays a call waiting message, you have the following choices:

Action

Current Call Waiting Call

Method

Hold

Answer 1. Press [Hold]

2. Upon hearing the ring, answer the waiting call

Press flashing button (only available if your phone is defined as Auto Join) Join in 3-way

mode

Continue

Continue

Redirect Press a preprogrammed DIVERT CALL to XXXX key.

See

Divert Call on page 100

. Divert is used to divert an incoming call to another system station, group or Library number.

View number of waiting calls

• Press [Wait] (see

Receiving and Answering Calls on page 47)

;

or

• For a specific ACD group, press a preprogrammed Call Waiting ACD DSS button

Station Telephony Features

Calls Waiting: Receiving

82 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Action

Current Call Waiting Call

Hold/

Continue

Join in Broker/

Consultation/3-

Way/

Combination

Conference

Call

(All the following features are activated after the waiting call is answered.)

Method

Press to put the current call on hold and answer the waiting call. Press again to establish one of the following call types:

To activate a Broker Call

• Press [XFER] to alternate between the parties (any number of times)

Then either:

• Press [SPKR] or hang up in order to allow conversation between the two parties;

or

• Press [fRls] to release all parties and press [SPKR]

To activate a Consultation Call

When your conversation is concluded, press [XFER] to return to the original call (the consultation is released)

To activate a 3-Way Call

• Press [fRls] to release the third party and return to original call (same as Consultation

Call);

or

• Press [XFER][ or CONF key] to connect all three parties

To activate a Combination Call

1. Press [XFER] to put the third party on hold

2. After concluding the private conversation, press [XFER] or CONF to complete a 3-Way

Conference Call

To add members to a 3-Way Call (Continous Conference)

• Press the Last Party Release DSS key to release the last party to join the conference; or

• Press to connect a new member to a 3-way call (becomes Continous Conference Call)

Station Telephony Features

Calls Waiting: Receiving

83 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Camp On (Call Back)

Use this feature when a station or a network destination is busy or does not answer, or when an outside line is busy, to request that the system automatically call you back when the required destination number or line is available. (Upon hearing a busy tone originating from an external destination, use the auto redial

[ARdl]

feature instead - see

page 42

.)

Answering the call causes the camped on station to immediately ring. Camp On can also be operated from idle.

Camp On is automatically cancelled after a system-wide defined period after activation.

Press

[Camp]

to camp on to the unavailable line.

Page 1

INTERNAL called number or name

↓→ Msg.

[Camp]

Mute Elps

Page 2

CAMPING ON called number or name

Camping On upon hearing a busy tone:

1. Press

[Camp]

after hearing the busy tone.

2. The CAMPING ON Name message appears to inform you that you are camped on.

Alternatively, press

[2Rng]

to send a call waiting tone to the busy station. The station is now made aware that another call is waiting. Your side hears a second (quicker) ringback tone (system-wide defined).

Camping On while your phone is idle:

1. Press

[Camp]

.

2. Dial the destination number.

3. The CAMPING ON Name message appears to inform you that you are camped on.

Station Telephony Features

Camp On (Call Back)

84 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Entering additional destinations to the Camp On list:

1. Press

[Camp]

.

2. Choose

[Dest]

to enter destination.

3. Dial the destination number.

4. The CAMPING ON Name message appears to inform you that you are camped on.

Canceling a number from the Camp On list:

1. Press

[Camp]

.

2. Use

[Next]

to scroll through the list of Camp On destinations and select a destination.

3. Choose [Canc] to cancel Camp-On.

When the line is available, the system will call you back. Answer the call to automatically dial the camped on station/trunk (or should you hear the distinctive dial tone (defined system-wide), press

[Camp]

to initiate ringing).

For Trunks Only:After the trunk line is free, you must continue dialing the outside dial number for external numbers.

Station Telephony Features

Camp On (Call Back)

85 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Cancellation Code

Use the Cancellation code (default code: #10, #

>

0, or

>

0) as required when programming features.

The following symbol indicates a cancellation code:

8

See your system manager, as to which cancellation code is used in your system. The cancellation code can be entered by dialing or programming a key with the code, or adding the code to the program of a feature key.

Station Telephony Features

Cancellation Code

86 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Canned Messages

Use this feature to set one of any 16 canned messages for your station. Any internal caller to your station sees this message displayed on the second line of their display panel until you answer the call.

Canned message texts are pre-programmed by your system adminitrator. They can be used to indicate your status (or any other pertinent information) to the calling party. Contact your system administrator for the list of canned message texts used in your organization. Use the

Table on page 88

to list the canned messages available at your telephone.

NOTE! Check with your system administrator whether your Coral system supports the Canned Messages or Room Status feature. If your Coral system supports the Room Status feature (see

page 185 ),

the Canned Message feature is unavailable.

Press

[Room]

to access the Canned Messages options.

Page 1

↑→ COS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number fSet Trc

[Room]

[RSx]

Page 2

Room Status

↓→ RS0

RS1 RS2 RS3

Press the required Canned Message soft key (

[RSx]

where x= 0 to 15, see

Table on page 88

) to activate. The canned message appears on the top line. When activated, a bullet is shown next to

• [RSx]

, and next to

• [Room]

.

To cancel, press the relevant lit

• [RSx]

key again.

NOTE! The first canned message that you activated is the one that appears on the internal caller’s display panel. Therefore, to set a new message ensure that you cancel all previous messages.

Station Telephony Features

Canned Messages

87 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Canned Message

Number

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

7

8

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

[RS11]

[RS12]

[RS13]

[RS14]

[RS15]

[RS7]

[RS8]

[RS9]

[RS10]

[RS0]

[RS1]

[RS2]

[RS3]

[RS4]

[RS5]

[RS6]

Canned Message - Text and User Access Codes

Soft Key Canned Message Text Access Code

(Dial Pad#)

7033

7034

7035

7036

7037

7038

7039

7040

7041

7026

7027

7028

7029

7030

7031

7032

Station Telephony Features

Canned Messages

88 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Conference (Multi-Party) Calls

Conference calls allow several users to carry on a multi-party conversation. Up to 6 or 15 participants are permitted, depending on the system hardware assigned to the conference call.

Use the following guide to navigate through this section:

Conference Calls: Meet Me

..........................................................page 90

Conference Calls: Conference Multi-Party Lock

..........................page 91

Conference Calls: Conference View/Release

..............................page 92

Station Telephony Features

Conference (Multi-Party) Calls

89 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Conference Calls: Meet Me

Joining a conference:

Dial the conference number (7098-7099) at the assigned time.

NOTE! A warning tone will be heard by all the participants.

Adding an additional party to a conference:

1. Press

[Xfer]

.

2. Dial the assigned conference number.

3. Press

SPKR

or hang up to leave the conference, or remain on the line to stay connected to the conference.

NOTE! A warning tone will be heard by all the participants.

Leaving a conference:

Press

SPKR

or hang up.

Force Releasing an entire conference:

Press

[fRls]

.

Station Telephony Features

Conference Calls: Meet Me

90 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Conference Calls: Conference Multi-Party Lock

The authorized participant can block other users from joining an ongoing conference. Conference Lock acts as an on/off switch, locking and unlocking the conference as required.

Press

[cLck]

once to lock the conference. Press again to Unlock.

NOTE! If you “lock” the conference and leave, you will not be able to rejoin until another conference member “unlocks”.

Station Telephony Features

Conference Calls: Conference Multi-Party Lock

91 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Conference Calls: Conference View/Release

This feature allows an authorized user, from idle, to release a conference participant from an ongoing conference. The feature also allows viewing the participant list.

Press

[CIns]

to access this feature.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ ActC

CID Wake

[cIns]

Page 2

CONF. INSPECT

ENTER CONF NUM

***** Enter Destination ****

Page 3

RELEASE Participant Name

CONF Conference #

Par# Prev Next fRls

1. Press

[CIns]

.

2. Dial the Conference number.

3. Choose

[Par#]

and dial the participant number or use the

[Next]

and

[Prev]

to scroll between participants and choose which one should be released.

4. Choose

[fRls]

to activate Forced Release for the participant displayed on the top line. No confirmation tone will be heard.

5. If the Conference contains no participants, the display shows CONF EMPTY on the top line.

6. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit. You may repeat this process for any number of participants.

Station Telephony Features

Conference Calls: Conference View/Release

92 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

COS Switchover

Each station has a Primary and Secondary Class Of Service (COS), which provides the basis for dialing and feature capabilities for a particular station. Use this feature to change your Class of Service from Primary to Secondary or vice versa.

Press

[COS]

to access this feature.

Page 1

↑→

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[COS] fSet Trc Room

Page 2

COS CHANGE

ENTER PASSCODE t

Page 3

YOUR PRIMARY

COS IS: 0

→Prim

Seco

1. Press

[COS]

.

2. Dial your four-digit passcode. To define your passcode, see

Setup: Passcode

on page 238

.

3. Press

[Seco]

to switch to your secondary COS or

[Prim]

to return to your primary COS.

4. Listen for the confirmation tone.

NOTE! COS Switchover is denied when your phone is in Checkout mode.

Station Telephony Features

COS Switchover

93 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Directory

This feature provides a searchable directory listing. Both Shared and Personal records are combined and organized alphabetically, for easy retrieval. A search result can be dialed at the touch of a key.

The Directory enables:

• Fast search by name

• Number retrieval and autodial

• Add/edit entries to the Personal directory

Shared Directory is composed of the following internal and external numbers:

• Public Speed Call Library

• Hunt Group

• Boss Group

• All stations defined in the system

Personal Directory is a self-built database of external telephone numbers. It is accessible only from the station at which it was entered.

An entry to the Personal Directory is distinguished from a Shared Directory entry by a preceding asterisk.

Calls arriving to your station are matched against entries to your Personal Directory. Incoming calls from contacts listed in the directory are shown on the display as they appear in the Directory.

Station Telephony Features

Directory

94 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

To search through the Directory:

NOTE! Both Shared and Personal directories are accessed by the first constituent of an entry. If an entry consists of a given name and a family name, the search will look for the attribute listed first.

1. Press

[Dir] or DIR.

2. For Personal Directory contacts press

[Priv]

or dial the feature code #9.

3. Enter all or part of the name of your contact party using the alphanumeric keys (see

Keypad – Alphabetic Mode

and

Editing Keys

on

page 97

).

You may also use the

[Next]

and

[Prev]

to scroll through the Directory.

4. While the name or number of the retrieved contact party is displayed, you can do one of the following:

• Place a call by pressing

[Dial]

or asterisk (*) - see steps below.

• Modify a Personal Directory contact information by pressing

[Edit]

or dialing #2. See

To modify an entry to the

Personal Directory: on page 95

.

• Permanently remove a Personal Directory entry by pressing

[Remv]

or dialing #0. See

To remove an entry from the

Personal Directory: on page 96

.

To place a call from the Directory:

To place a call from within the Directory, press

[Dial]

or asterisk (*) while the name or number of the retrieved contact party is displayed.

To modify an entry to the Personal Directory:

1. Press

[Edit]

or dial #2 while the name or number of the retrieved contact party is displayed.

2. Edit the name using the alphanumeric keys. Up to 16 characters are allowed (press

[LoCs]

,

[UpCs]

,

[Char]

,

[Dgt]

,

[Spac]

,

[BckS]

as

required). See

Keypad – Alphabetic Mode

and

Editing Keys

on

page 97

.

3. To edit the number press

[Num]

.

4. To edit the name press

[Name]

.

Station Telephony Features

Directory

95 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

5. To save the changes press

[Save]

.

6. To place a call press

[Dial]

or asterisk (*). Save the changes and call the saved contact.

To remove an entry from the Personal Directory:

To permanently delete an entry (personal directory only), press

[Remv]

or dial #0 while the entry is displayed. You will not be able to restore the deleted entry. The entry subsequent to the one removed appears on the display.

To add a new entry to the Personal Directory:

1. Press

[Dir] or DIR.

2. Press

[New]

or dial #1.

3. At the prompt, enter the name of your contact party using the alphanumeric keys. Up to 16 characters are allowed (press

[LoCs]

,

[UpCs]

,

[Char]

,

[Dgt]

,

[Spac]

,

[BckS]

as required). See

Keypad – Alphabetic Mode

and

Editing Keys

on page 97

.

4. Press

[Num]

.

5. At the prompt, enter the telephone number of your contact party (do not enter the outside line access code).

6. Press

[Save]

to save the entry (an asterisk marks the saved entry as a Personal one).

OR

Press

[Dial]

or press asterisk (*) to save the entry and call the saved contact.

NOTE! Any attempt to make an entry in excess of the number of entries allowed by the system, or to assign a dial number already existing on the Directory to a new contact, will fail.

Station Telephony Features

Directory

96 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Keypad – Alphabetic Mode

Use the keypad to make new entries or navigate through the directory to a specific entry. The cursor advances automatically when a different key is pressed. If two consecutive letters are on the same key, wait for the cursor to disappear before proceeding to the next key. The following table indicates the key presses used to input the required letters. This table may override the designations on your keypad.

For example, to enter “ANN” press: [2 ABC]

A

[6 MNO] [6 MNO]

N

[WAIT] [6 MNO] [6 MNO]

N

Station Telephony Features

Directory

KEYS

Press:

[1]

[2 ABC]

[3 DEF]

[4 GHI]

[5 JKL]

[6 MNO]

[7 PQRS]

[8 TUV]

[0]

[#]

[9 WXYZ]

[*]

1 Time

P

T

J

M

D

G

A

W

CHARACTERS

2 Times 3 Times

Q

U

K

N

E

H

B

X

R

V

L

O

F

I

C

Y

97

4 Times

S

Z

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Editing Keys

The Directory service allows you to easily retrieve a telephone number by keying a name of your contact and to place a call to the search result as soon as the match is found. The available key combinations are listed in the table below.

Options marked with a diamond (

♦) are applicable for the Personal Directory only.

Option

Personal Directory

Delete Entry

New Entry

Modify Entry

Backspace

Space

Name/Number

Save

Send

Scroll

[New]

[Edit]

[BckS]

[Spac]

[Num]

[Name]

[Save]

[Dial]

[Next]

[Prev]

Soft Key Access Code

(Dial Pad#)

[Priv]

[Remv]

#9

#0

#1

#2

#3

#4

#5

Description

Access the personal directory subset only.

Delete the displayed personal entry.

(There is no option to restore the deleted entry.)

Add a new entry to your Personal Directory.

Edit the displayed personal entry.

Erase the last entered character or digit.

Insert a space between words.

Toggle between name and number of your contact.

To program a Name/Number toggle button, use feature code #128.

N/A

*

N/A

Save the displayed contact.

Place a call to the displayed contact and save.

Scroll through the Directory entries, contact by contact (entries are alphabetically organized).

Station Telephony Features

Directory

98 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Option

Caps Lock

Uppercase/Lowercase

Characters

Soft Key Access Code

(Dial Pad#)

[LoCs]

[UpCs]

Description

Designated DSS button

Toggle between uppercase and lowercase characters.

To program the Caps Lock toggle button, contact your system administrator for the Caps Lock feature code.

Character/Digit

[Char]

[Dgt]

Designated DSS button

Toggle between digits and characters.

To program the Character/Digit toggle button, contact your system administrator for the Character/Digit feature code.

Station Telephony Features

Directory

99 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Divert Call

Enables you to divert an incoming call while actively engaged in another call, or while an idle station is ringing, without answering it. The call you are engaged in is not interrupted, nor is the incoming caller aware of the diversion. The destination can be any permissible dial number in the system. Typically Divert Call can be used to send an incoming call to a boss group, a secretary, or to voice mail, by making Library the destination of the diversion. This feature can be utilized only if you have a programmed DIVERT CALL key with a destination upon receiving an incoming call. The caller name or number is displayed on the top left.

caller #

↓→ DND

Mute FwdA Num

To activate during ringing:

1. Press a preprogrammed

DIVERT CALL to XXXX

key.

2. The incoming call is diverted to the programmed destination; the current call continues uninterrupted or the station remains idle.

NOTES!

• See

page 167

for instructions on how to program a key. To program a DIVERT CALL key, use feature code

#1445, followed by the destination number. You may program as many keys as you want, each with a different destination.

• Possible destinations are operator, station/group, network number, public speed call library, DVMS pre-recorded message, UNA/central bell or group call.

• Your station must be defined as multi-appearance to be able to divert a new call while engaged in a previous one.

Station Telephony Features

Divert Call

100 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Do Not Disturb (DND)

Use the Do Not Disturb feature to block all incoming calls to your station. When blocked, you can still receive Voice Page calls and you are still able to make outgoing calls.

Any call forwarding to your telephone is automatically cancelled when you activate the DND feature. Only a station that has

DND Override privilege will be able to call your telephone.

When the feature is activated, the calling station will see the DONT DIST message (or UNATTENDED for Attendant) and hear the reorder tone.

This feature is accessible via

[DND]

from idle or when receiving an incoming call.

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[DND]

FlxC Redl PgQ

To activate, press the

[DND]

toggle key once. To cancel, press the

[DND]

toggle key again.

NOTE! Should you hear a reorder tone, DND is denied at your station (as defined by the Class of

Service).

When the feature is activated, a bullet (or thick arrow) appears next to

[DND]

and a *DND* message briefly appears on the top line to remind you that the feature is activated.

$

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[DND]

FlxC Redl PgQ

Station Telephony Features

Do Not Disturb (DND)

101 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Do Not Disturb Override

This feature can be applied to stations that are idle, but have been set to Do Not Disturb or Unattended. After dialing a station and receiving a reorder tone, if the DONT DIST or UNATTENDED message appears on the top line, an authorized user can override the DND using this feature and your call can be put through to the station.

1. Press

[oDND]

or

[BrkI]

.

2. Listen for the ringback tone and wait for an answer.

Station Telephony Features

Do Not Disturb Override

102 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

ELA (Extension Line Appearance)

Similar to the Boss Group feature (see

page 67

), an ELA Group is a number of stations operating together in which the

individual stations share a common line appearance. Unlike a Boss Group, the ELA Group number is the extension number of the first (main) ELA member station. Therefore, there are no ELA NPL type numbers reserved in the system.

Up to 32 ELA line keys may be programmed on each group member station. When an ELA-defined line key flashes, it flashes at all the member stations. Any member may answer the call by pressing the flashing line key. The line key remains lit as long as the call is in progress. In addition to flashing, member stations may be alerted to incoming calls by an accompanying ring.

The ring setting (whether the ring is immediate, delayed, or no ring) can be determined at each member station if at least one line key is defined by the user.

If the ELA call is put on hold, the line key flashes at all the member stations and any member (provided the privacy feature is not activated) may break-in to the call by pressing the flashing line key. To place a call, a member may press any available line key; the line key remains lit at all member stations for the duration of the call.

Use the following guide to navigate through this section:

ELA Group Line Keys: Programming

.........................................page 104

ELA Groups: Using

.....................................................................page 106

ELA Groups: Privacy

..................................................................page 108

ELA Groups: Exclusive Hold

.......................................................page 109

Station Telephony Features

ELA (Extension Line Appearance)

103 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

ELA Group Line Keys: Programming

Each phone in an ELA Group can be programmed with up to 32 ELA line keys. To learn about the different uses of ELA line keys, see

below

.

NOTE! In order for ELA calls to be received on the main ELA station, the station must be defined as multiappearance and be a member of an ELA group. You may belong to more than one ELA group.

To Program ELA Line Keys:

1. Press

[fSet] [Prog]

.

2. Press the DSS key you want to program as the ELA line key.

3. Dial the ELA LINE feature code (default: #17718).

4. Dial the ELA Group number (main ELA station extension number).

5. Continue to enter the Ring State (see

below

).

6. Enter the line key number (00 to 31). Two digits must be entered.

7. Press the selected DSS key again.

8. Press

SPKR

to release.

ELA: Defining the ELA Line Keys Ring State

Only one type of ring state may be defined on your station. (If your station is member of more than one ELA group, you can define different ring states for each ELA group).

Although you are prompted to set the ring state each time when programming individual ELA line key (see

above

), you can use this feature to override any previous ring state definition and set one ring state for all the ELA line keys. Note that the last ring state defined (whether using this ELA feature or when programming an ELA line key) will apply to all the ELA line keys.

NOTE! Regardless of the ring state defined for your station, the line key flashes for all incoming ELA

Group calls and remains lit for the duration of the call.

Station Telephony Features

ELA Group Line Keys: Programming

104 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Press

[ELA]

from idle and then dial the ELA Group number to define the ring state of ELA line keys.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

↑→ fSet

Trc Room

[ELA]

[Yes]

[No]

[Dly]

Page 2

EXT. LINE APPEAR

***** Enter Destination ****

Page 3

EXT. XXXX

Yes No Dly

Yes is used to define ELA line keys to immediately ring at your station upon receiving an ELA Group call.

No is used to define ELA line keys to not ring at your station upon receiving an ELA Group call.

Dly is used to define ELA line keys to ring at your station upon receiving an ELA Group call after a systemdefined timeout period.

Station Telephony Features

ELA Group Line Keys: Programming

105 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

ELA Groups: Using

Calling an ELA Group:

• Dial the ELA Group number.

NOTE! The line key LED of the ELA main station as well as all group members flashes and may also ring

(see

ELA: Defining the ELA Line Keys Ring State on page 104 ).

Making calls:

1. Press a free ELA

LINE

key.

2. Dial the required number.

NOTE! The line key LED of the ELA main station as well as all group members changes from off to steady on for the duration of the call.

Receiving calls:

When the line flashes (note that the telephone may also ring - see

page 104

):

1. Any ELA member may press the flashing

LINE

key or, if phone rings, lift the handset.

2. Answer the call.

NOTE! The line key LED of all group members now changes from flashing to steady on for the duration of the call.

Putting a call on hold:

• Press a programmed HOLD key at your station.

NOTE! If Exclusive Hold is defined at your station, then pressing Hold causes an exclusive hold state such that the call can only be retrieved from your station. See

ELA Groups: Exclusive Hold on page 109 .

Station Telephony Features

ELA Groups: Using

106 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Retrieving a call from on hold:

• Any member of the ELA Group may press a flashing

LINE

key, provided that the Exclusive Hold feature was not activated for the call (see

ELA Groups: Exclusive Hold on page 109

).

Breaking in to an ELA call:

• Any member of the ELA Group may break-in to a call by pressing the lit

LINE

key, provided that the Privacy feature

was not activated for the call (see

ELA Groups: Exclusive Hold on page 109

). Both parties hear a break-in warning tone before you join the conversation.

Station Telephony Features

ELA Groups: Using

107 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

ELA Groups: Privacy

As an ELA Group member you can put your telephone into Privacy mode. This prevents other phone stations within ELA

Group from joining or breaking in to your conversations. The feature can be utilized for a specific ELA call or for all ELA calls.

Operating Privacy for all ELA calls:

1. To activate Privacy, press

[fSet] [Priv]

.

The message PRIVACY is displayed.

When this feature is activated, a bullet appears next to

[Priv]

.

2. To cancel Privacy, press

[Priv]

again.

The message NO PRIVACY is displayed.

You may override the station Privacy setting on a call-by-call basis. Privacy is a toggle feature. Thus, if your station is in

Privacy mode, you may remove the Privacy restriction and allow others to join your conversation; alternatively, if your station is not in Privacy mode, you may apply Privacy to a specific call.

NOTE! Once Privacy is defined for your station (for all calls) a bullet is displayed next to [Priv], even if the

key is pressed to temporarily override the Privacy feature. However, when your call is completed the telephone will return to the permanent status, private or non-private, as previously defined for all calls.

Station Telephony Features

ELA Groups: Privacy

108 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

ELA Groups: Exclusive Hold

As an ELA Group member, you can put your telephone into Exclusive Hold mode. This ensures that a call you place on hold can be retrieved only at the station where Exclusive Hold was originally placed. If Exclusive Hold is cancelled, the call put on hold can be retrieved by any other member of the ELA Group, by pressing the flashing

LINE

key. The feature can be utilized for a specific call or for all calls.

Operating Exclusive Hold for all ELA calls

1. To activate Exclusive Hold, press

[fSet] [eHld]

.

The message EXCLUSIVE HOLD is displayed.

When this feature is activated, a bullet appears next to

[eHld]

.

2. To cancel Exclusive Hold, press

[eHld]

again.

The message NON EXCL. HOLD is displayed.

You may override the station Exclusive Hold setting on a call-by-call basis. Exclusive Hold is a toggle feature. Thus, if your station is in EXCLUSIVE HOLD mode, you may remove the Exclusive Hold restriction and allow others to pick up your held call; alternatively, if your station is not in EXCLUSIVE HOLD mode, you may apply Exclusive Hold to a specific call. This is done by pressing

[eHld]

during a call before pressing

HOLD

. Press this key to toggle the feature on and off. This key can be pressed as many times as necessary. If your telephone is not in Exclusive Hold mode for all calls, press

[eHld]

before you press

[Hold]

. Press

[Hold]

to place a call into Exclusive Hold. The

LINE

on hold will remain steady on at all other phones in the ELA

Group, and the call will only be retrievable from your station.

Transferring call to a group member (during conversation):

Once Exclusive Hold is defined for your station (all calls) a bullet is displayed next to

[eHld]

, even if the key is pressed to temporarily override the Exclusive Hold feature. However, when your call is completed the telephone will return to the permanent status, as previously defined for all calls. If your telephone is in Exclusive Hold mode for all calls, press

[eHld] before you press

[Hold]

.

1. Press

[Hold]

. The

LINE

on hold will flash at all phones in the ELA Group.

2. Listen for the confirmation tone.

3. Inform the party to whom you wish to transfer on which line the call is on hold.

Station Telephony Features

ELA Groups: Exclusive Hold

109 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Executive Privilege

Use this feature to temporarily copy all the COS features from any system station to your phone, enabling you to use features or to dial numbers restricted at your current station. After one call, the current phone returns to its previous COS.

Some phones may be denied the Executive Privilege feature, as defined by the current Class of Service.

Press

[Exec]

to access this feature.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ GpCl

ACD Lock

[Exec]

Page 2

EXECUTIVE

*** Enter Dial # ***

Operating Executive Privilege:

1. Press

[Exec]

.

2. Dial the station number.

3. Dial the passcode of that station (see

Setup on page 238)

.

Now the current phone resembles the other station. Continue to dial as you would from that station.

Station Telephony Features

Executive Privilege

110 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

FlexiCall

Calls ringing at your Coral station can simultaneously ring at any designated internal or external phone (such as home phone, mobile, and second station) and can be answered at either phone. Your phone can distinguish between calls arriving from an internal or external source when

ringing at the remote destination (see

Internal/

External FlexiCall on page 112)

. Calls can be

transferred back to the original phone anytime during the call.

Home Phone

The FlexiCall feature is an ideal solution for office applications requiring a “courtesy” telephone, and applications requiring an extension telephone to a system phone. The FlexiCall feature may be used also to “semi-connect” ancillary devices such as answering machines, fax machines, or data modems to your phone, without using a separate telephone number.

Cellular Phone

FCN

ON/OFF

ENTER

1

4

7

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

The remote destination rings even when your office phone is disconnected.

PSTN

Cellular

Office Phone 1

Office Phone 2

The remote destination does not ring if any of the following features is activated at your Coral station: Do Not Disturb, Call

Forward All, Call Forward Busy, Call Forward Timed, Auto Answer.

The remote destination does not ring for the following incoming calls: Group call, Boss Group call (only first member of a

Boss Group will ring), ELA Group call (only one member of an ELA Group will ring), Bell/UNA, Reminder, Wakeup, Voice

Page.

Station Telephony Features

FlexiCall

111 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Internal/External FlexiCall

You can distinguish between calls arriving from an internal or external source when operating the FlexiCall feature.

You can set calls arriving to your phone to concurrently ring at your remote phone as follows (see table below):

• Internal and External calls ring at your remote phone.

• Only internal calls ring at your remote phone.

• Only external calls ring at your remote phone.

1

To set Set FlexiCall options as follows:

Case Internal Calls ring at: External Calls ring at: FlexiCall All

Set to:

Disabled

FlexiCall

Internal Set to:

Activated

FlexiCall

External Set to:

Disabled

2 Disabled Disabled Activated

3 Enabled Irrelevant Irrelevant

4 Disabled Activated Activated

= your Coral Station

Station Telephony Features

FlexiCall

= your remote phone

112 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Press

[FlxC]

to access the FlexiCall options.

Page 1

→ DND

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[FlxC]

Redl PgQ

Page 2

FlexiCall Remote Dest

All Ext.

Int.

[All]

[Ext.]

All Incoming Calls is used to define your remote destination for all incoming calls.

External Calls is used to define your remote destination for all incoming external calls.

[Int.]

Internal Calls is used to define your remote destination for all incoming internal calls.

To Operate FlexiCall:

1. From idle press

[FlxC]

.

2. Choose the required FlexiCall option ( [All],

[Ext.]

, or

[Int.]

).

3. To set FlexiCall, dial your remote destination number (internal number or Public/Private Library number) at which calls will ring simultaneously with your Coral station.

A remote destination can be: an operator, station, network number, UNA/ Central Bell, or external number (stationary or

cellular) via Public/Private Speed Call Library.

• To cancel FlexiCall, choose [Canc];

• To change the FlexiCall destination, choose

[Dest]

and dial the remote destination number.

4. Listen for the confirmation tone.

NOTE! [Int.] and [Ext.] calls may be routed to different destinations. If [All] is defined, it overrides the settings

for Internal and External.

Station Telephony Features

FlexiCall

113 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Receiving Calls at a Remote Destination

If your remote destination is located outside the enterprise (PSTN or public cellular network), you can answer all your phone calls from your remote destination. Once you answer a call at your remote destination, your remote phone will be activated as a part of the Coral system and you have the following options:

Function Dial Use to:

Place a new call

Transfer call

Switch to Broker/

Consultation/3-Way

Conference call

Divert call to Coral station

*1 Listen for a dial tone indicating that you can place a call to a new contact. Your original conversing party will be disconnected.

*2 A dial tone prompts you to enter the required transfer number. Transfer can be screened or unscreened. To return to the original conversing party (when transfer destination is busy or does not answer) dial *2 again.

*2 A dial tone prompts you to enter the required third party number. Depending on your Class

of Service definitions, one of the following party functions will be activated (see

Broker/

Consultation/3-Way Conference call on page 137)

:

Broker Call, Consultation, 3-Way, or

Combination of Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call

*3 A dial tone prompts you to enter a divert number. You will be disconnected and your conversing party will be transferred to the divert number. Your number will not show on the divert party’s display.

Access voice mail/IVR

*4

For instructions on accessing voice mail from an IRSS phone, see

page 115 .

Divert call to your phone

*5 You will be disconnected and your conversing party will be transferred to your Coral station. Your number will not show on your phone’s display. If your station does not answer within the system-defined time-out period, the call will return to your remote phone.

Call Recording/

Help Requesting

*6 Used to Start/Stop Recording incoming calls (requires a system-wide defined Navigator application).

Or send Help request (requires a pre-selected system-wide defined keyset station), see

page 130

.

Station Telephony Features

FlexiCall

114 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

To activate voice mail/IVR from your remote phone:

You can access your voice mailbox, retrieve messages and setup voice mail options for your Coral station.

1. Answer the remote call.

2. Dial *1. Listen for the dial tone. Your original party will be released.

3. Dial the voice mail or IVR dial number (see table

below

).

4. At the automated voice mail answer, dial the voice mail remote access code followed by your station number to access your station’s voice mail box.

5. Dial *4 as soon as the automated voice mail answers. This allows the system to recognize the voice mail (or IVR) commands.

6. Choose the required option from the voice mail or IVR system menu.

NOTE! Contact your system administrator for the voice mail (IVR) dial number and voice mail remote access code. Use the table below to record that number and code:

Voice Mail (IVR) Numbers/Codes

Voice Mail (IVR)

Dial Number

Voice Mail Remote

Access Code

Station Telephony Features

FlexiCall

115 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Freedom

See

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom on page 133

.

Station Telephony Features

Freedom

116 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls

Group Calls are conference calls for up to 100 participants. Each Group Call has a unique dial number. Group Call members can be internal stations or external numbers dialled through Public Library numbers. There are two types of group calls:

• Preset Group Calls have predefined members

• Add On (Temporary) Group Calls have no predefined members; the Group Call initiator adds participants

Participants in group calls include the group call operator (controller), the group call initiator (usually responsible for subject matter and discussion), and the other group call members.

Signals heard during a group call depend on the system settings. Optional signal include a warning tone heard by the conference initiator when activating the group call and a signal heard by all participant every time a participant joins or leaves an ongoing conference call. When a Group Call is placed, all stations defined as registered members for that particular group ring. Unanswered stations continue to ring until a pre-defined timeout period expires.

Participation in group calls can be limited by:

• Blocking group members from joining after the ringing has stopped

• Blocking users that are not registered to the group call (locking the call)

There are two ways in which non-registered users can join non-locked group calls:

• A non-registered user can dial the access number

• A registered user can connect the non-registered user to the group call.

The Group Operator has the option of controlling the Mute / Non-Mute mode of conference participation of each participant.

Mute mode means the participant may only listen. Typically, a conference initiator might initiate a muted conference in which only the conference initiator can speak; during the conference, the Group Operator can grant permission to individual participants to speak.

Group Call options are set in the Group Call definitions. A user can be authorized to force release a participant or terminate an entire conference.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls

117 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Defining a Group Call Operator:

If you are authorized to be a Group Call Operator you can define another (COS defined) station as the operator of a group call.

1. Press the preprogrammed Group Call Operator DSS key, or dial the Group Call operator code (#17716).

See

Programming: Feature Keys

on page 167

for instructions on how to program a DSS key.

2. Dial the keyset station number.

NOTE! If you are authorized to be a Group Call Operator you can also dial your own station number to define yourself as the group call operator.

Group Call Access Codes

Use the following form to write in your group call details:

Group Call Members Group

Operator

Group Call

Access Code

(group #)

Conference

Number

(conf #)

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls

118 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Use the following guide to navigate through this section:

Group Calls: Preset Conference Activation

................................page 120

Group Calls: Temporary Conference Activation

.........................page 121

Group Calls: Joining

...................................................................page 122

Group Calls: Adding Participants (when not part of the Call)

.....page 123

Group Calls: Submitting Request to Speak

................................page 125

Group Calls: Controlling Permission to Speak

...........................page 126

Group Calls: Forced Release of a Participant

............................page 127

Group Calls: Forced Release of an Entire Group Call

...............page 128

Press

[GpCl]

to access the Group Call options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[GpCl]

ACD Lock Exec

[RlsP]

[RlsG]

[AddO]

Page 2

Group Call Conference

RlsP RlsG AddO

Participant Release is used to allow an authorized user to release a participant from an ongoing conference.

The feature does not allow the user to view the list of participants. See

page 127

.

Group Release is used to allow an authorized user to release the entire group call. See

page 128

.

Temporary Add On. The Temporary Conference feature allows an authorized user to establish an Add-On

(Temporary) Group Call by adding participants as the conference is being set up. See

page 121

.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls

119 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Preset Conference Activation

Preset Group Calls are comprised of a number of specified members whose stations ring simultaneously when an assigned

Group Call number is dialled. This feature allows a conference initiator to contact all the registered members with one button press. The maximum number of participants is 100, depending on the system configuration.

Calling a Preset Group:

1. Press the preprogrammed Group Call DSS key, or dial the Group Call access code.

See

Programming: Feature Keys

on page 167

for instructions on how to program a DSS key.

2. All the member stations start ringing.

3. Wait for members to join, listen for the warning tone (if defined system-wide) every time a member answers.

4. Start speaking when the CONF COMPLETED message appears momentarily on the display (the message indicates that all non-answered stations have stopped ringing).

5. If none of the member stations answered, the NO ANSWER message appears.

NOTE! For Group Call access code, see the table on page 118 .

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Preset Conference Activation

120 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Temporary Conference Activation

The Temporary Conference feature allows an authorized user to establish an Add-On (Temporary) Group Call by adding participants as the conference is being set up. For this purpose, vacant Group Calls containing no preset members are defined system-wide. The Group Call initiator adds members from his/her station. A Temporary Group Call may include internal stations and/or external telephone numbers via a public speed call library. A few preset group calls may be joined to an Add-

On Group Call via Public Libraries.

Calling a Temporary Group:

1. Press

[GpCl] [AddO]

.

2. Listen for the dial tone.

3. Dial the Group Call access code.

4. Press

[AddPr]

.

5. Dial the required station and/or Public Library. To add additional members, repeat from Step

1

.

Up to 5 or 14 destinations can be added, depending on the system configuration.

6. To delete a participant, press

[DelP]

. Press

[DelP]

again to delete additional participants. This operates on a last-in-first-out basis – the participant added most recently will be deleted first, followed by the next most recent, and so on.

7. Press

[Call]

to initiate the Group Call.

All the called stations will now start ringing. As each member joins you will hear a warning tone (if defined systemwide).

8. Start speaking when the CONF COMPLETED message appears momentarily on the display (the message indicates that all non-answered stations have stopped ringing).

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Temporary Conference Activation

121 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Joining

The registered members join a conference being initiated by answering the incoming group call.

Provided the conference is not locked against non-registered participants, they can join the conference by dialing the group call access code or can be transferred to the group call by an authorized user.

Joining a Group Call:

While your phone is ringing:

1. Answer the ringing phone or press the lit Group Call DSS key.

2. A warning tone will be heard by all participants (if defined system-wide).

After station has stopped ringing:

1. Press the lit Group Call DSS key or dial the Group Call access code.

2. A warning tone will be heard by all participants (if defined system-wide).

NOTE! When the group is defined as blocked against joining an ongoing conference, the BUSY message will be displayed and the busy tone will be heard.

Leaving a Group Call:

1. Press

SPKR

or hang up.

2. A warning tone will be heard by all participants (if defined system-wide).

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Joining

122 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Adding Participants (when not part of the Call)

Allows an authorized user to transfer a new participant to an established conference. The feature enables a user engaged in a conversation to add his conversing party to the ongoing conference. The feature can be enabled when the Group Call is not locked against non-registered participants, and connecting to the ongoing conference is not restricted.

Adding an additional participant to an ongoing Group Call:

While connected to a station/trunk:

1. Press

[Xfer]

.

2. Listen for the dial tone.

3. Press the lit Group Call DSS key or dial the Group Call access code.

A warning tone will be heard by all participants (if defined system-wide).

4. Both the new participant and yourself are connected to the group call.

NOTES!

When the group is defined as locked against non-registered participants, and one of the conversing parties is not

registered, the reorder tone is heard and the CNF LOCK message is displayed. The registered party joins successfully, while the non-registered party is disconnected. If neither are registered members, both conversing parties will be disconnected.

When the group is defined such that no new participant can join an ongoing conference, both conversing parties

will be disconnected. The busy tone is heard and the BUSY message is displayed.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Adding Participants (when not part of the Call)

123 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Adding Participants (by Group Operator)

Allows the group operator to add participants to an established conference of which the group operator is also a participant.

Adding an additional participant to an ongoing Group Call:

1. Press the preprogrammed

ADD MEMBER

DSS key during an established conference; the corresponding DSS key is lit.

NOTE! See

page 167 for instructions on how to program a DSS key. To program an ADD MEMBER key,

use feature code #1304.

2. Press the member’s preprogrammed DSS key.

NOTES!

• You cannot manually dial the internal/public/private library number. Therefore, you will need to assign DSS keys for each conference member (up to 6 or 15, depending on system hardware) you want to be able to add to a

Group Call following this procedure.

• DSS buttons may also be programmed with Trunk Groups followed by an external dial number to enable joining external members. These members, however, are subject to all previous group call definitions, where they must be given the right to speak or remain in Mute mode while listening to the Group Call (see

page 125

).

3. The member’s phone rings.

The ADD MEMBER DSS key LED is turned off and the member’s DSS key lights at the Group Operator’s station.

4. The member answers and joins the group call.

NOTE! The ADD MEMBER DSS LED remains lit when attempting to add a non-legal dial number to the

Group Call, allowing you to attempt another number.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Adding Participants (by Group Operator)

124 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Submitting Request to Speak

Members may be permitted to participate in a Group Call with the ability to speak and hear each other, or in the Mute mode.

In case of a muted conference only a Group Call initiator has the right to speak. The user defined as Group Operator can set his own station to the audible mode, while connected to the conference, and may grant the right to speak to other participants.

This feature allows you to request permission to speak from the Group Operator. The request is submitted while your current conference is in progress, without disturbing it.

Sending a request to speak to the group operator:

1. Press the

Speech Request

DSS key or

[Xfer]

. (To program a Speech Request key, use Help feature access code #1443,

followed by the Group Operator dial number.)

2. Continue attending the current conference, while watching the

Speech Request

key LED and the second line of the display.

3. The TRX. ON message indicates that you are given permission to speak.

4. The TRX. OFF message indicates that the permission to speak is taken away from you.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Submitting Request to Speak

125 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Controlling Permission to Speak

This function is relevant for Group Calls defined to admit participants only in Mute mode. This feature allows the Group

Operator to grant a participant permission to speak – either by operator's own initiative or as a response to the Request to

Speak sent by a Group Call participant. The operator can ignore the Request to Speak, or act as described below. To utilize the feature, the Group Operator's keyset must be equipped with a display and the DSS buttons programmed with participants' dial numbers.

Responding to the request to speak:

1. Listen for the muted ring and check the station number/name displayed.

2. Press the flashing DSS button associated with the station that is requesting permission to speak.

3. Notify the participant that permission to speak is given.

Initiating permission to speak:

1. Press the steadily lit DSS button associated with the required participant.

2. Ask the participant to start speaking.

Retracting permission to speak:

1. Notify the participant that the permission will be retracted.

2. Press the flashing DSS button associated with the participant to be muted.

NOTE! A Group Operator who left the conference and rejoined in the Mute mode must give himself permission to speak by pressing the steadily lit DSS button pre-programmed with his own dial number.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Controlling Permission to Speak

126 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Forced Release of a Participant

This feature allows an authorized user, from idle, to release a participant from an ongoing conference. The feature does not allow the user to view the list of participants.

Releasing a single participant:

1. Press

[GpCl] [RlsP]

.

2. Listen for the dial tone.

3. Dial the participant number or press the programmed DSS key.

4. Press

[fRls]

- no confirmation tone will be heard.

5. Press

[Exit]

to exit.

The group operator can also release a participant from an ongoing conference provided that the operator is authorized to release Group Call participants in the COS.

Releasing a participant (Group Call Operator):

1. Press the preprogrammed

RELEASE MEMBER

DSS key during an established conference; the corresponding DSS key is lit.

NOTE! See page 167 for instructions on how to program a DSS key. To program an RELEASE MEMBER

key, use feature code #1305.

2. Press the member’s preprogrammed DSS key.

NOTE! You cannot manually dial the internal/public/private library number.

3. The member is disconnected from the conference.

The member’s DSS key is extinguished at the Group Operator’s station.

4. The member returns to

Idle

state.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Forced Release of a Participant

127 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Group Calls: Forced Release of an Entire Group Call

This feature allows an authorized user to release the entire group call from idle.

Releasing an entire Group Call:

1. Press

[GpCl] [RlsG]

.

2. Listen for the dial tone.

3. Dial the access code of the required Group Call.

4. Press

[fRls]

- no confirmation tone will be heard.

5. Press

[Exit]

to exit.

Station Telephony Features

Group Calls: Forced Release of an Entire Group Call

128 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Headset Only

The feature is designed for users operating in Headset mode. It is of particular value at information centers where the headset option is the most efficient way of communication. When activated, the Headset Only feature causes calls to be conducted via the headset and disables the handset and the phone’s microphone and loudspeaker, along with the features that use these devices, e.g. voice page, etc. Calls are conducted via the headset even if the cradle switch is on-hook, enabling a user to make full use of the hands-free operation.

NOTES! When utilizing Headset Only feature:

• The SPKR key should be programmed as an ON/OFF (connect/release) key. See your system administrator.

• The phone can be set for Zip Tone mode. This mode is used to sound the ring tones directly through the

headset, rather than through the speaker. (For Zip Tone setup, see page 249)

• Refer to

page 25

for instructions on operating a

phone

programmed as Headset Only.

To activate Headset Only:

Press

HEADSET or

[fSet] [Head]

A bullet appears to the left of

[Head]

and HEADSET LED is lit green.

To disable Headset Only:

Press the lit

HEADSET or

[fSet] • [Head]

Station Telephony Features

Headset Only

129 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Help: Requesting

The Help Requesting feature allows you to alert a pre-selected station while you are in conversation with a request for help.

The Help feature is operated while your current call is in progress, without disrupting the call. Once you have agreed upon a partner for the help procedure, a predetermined action can take place between you and your partner when Help is activated.

A DSS key must be programmed to activate Help Requesting.

Programming a Help Requesting key:

1. Press

[fSet] [Prog]

.

2. Choose and press the DSS key.

3. Dial feature access code (default dial number: #1443).

4. Dial the destination station.

The destination must be another keyset equipped with a display.

5. Press the selected DSS key again.

6. You may program many keys, each with a different destination.

To program additional keys, repeat Steps

1

-

5

.

Sending a Help Request:

During a call when you need help, press the HELP DSS key and continue the call, while watching the HELP key LED. Your

HELP key LED is lit while the destination phone rings. The LED flashes when the call is answered.

The destination station displays the help message on the station display while the station is ringing. Wait for help or press the

HELP key again.

NOTE! Discuss with co-worker/partner what Help procedure should be performed when Help is requested.

Station Telephony Features

Help: Requesting

130 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Help: Answering

This feature allows you to receive a call for help from another station.

Answering a Help Request:

1. Answer the call, listen for the confirmation tone and check the station number displayed.

2. Press

SPKR

or hang up to release.

3. Take help action as agreed.

NOTE! If engaged in a call when help is requested, a muted ring tone and message is received.

Terminate the call or put it on hold and answer, so the requesting station knows that you have received the request for help.

Station Telephony Features

Help: Answering

131 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Hold

A calling party can be placed on hold while another call is made. The held party can hear one of the following: music, reorder tone, busy tone or no sound at all as defined system-wide.

Call Hold is accessible via

[Hold]

or HOLD.

Page 1

ANSWER

→ PgQ

Name

Xfer

[Hold]

Mute

Page 2

CALL HOLD Name

Next Conn

During a call, press

[Hold]

or HOLD to place the second party on hold.

The

[Hold]

soft key is shown with a bullet next to it, indicating that a call has been placed on hold at your station. A *HOLD* message appears on the top line to remind you that a call is held at your station. The HOLD LED is lit and

LOOP

flashes.

Retrieving the call from Hold:

Press the flashing

LOOP

key to connect or:

1. Press

[Hold]

or

HOLD

.

2. Choose

[Conn]

. If more than one party has been placed on hold, scroll between names by using

[Next]

.

3. The held calls are returned in “first in/first out order”.

If you do not return to the call on hold within a predetermined amount of time, the call will automatically return to you.

If your telephone is defined (by the system administrator) as Hard

HOLD

, the message CALL ON HOLD appears after placing a call on hold. When Hard Hold is activated on a call, your station will be considered busy for additional incoming calls; however, outgoing calls can still be made.

Station Telephony Features

Hold

132 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

The Freedom feature, also known as Individual Remote System Services (IRSS), enables you to connect an off-site non-Coral phone (such as your home phone or mobile) to the Coral and make calls from within the system. Many of the Coral’s extensive features (e.g. transfer, conference call, voice mail, access to public and private libraries) are available from this offsite phone. The off-site telephone operates as a virtual station in the Coral network, retaining the original features of the external telephone in addition to the Coral features.

NOTE! To enable the IRSS feature at your Coral station, you must first program a Private/Public Library number with your off-site phone number (see

page 244

and page 230

). Use the table below to record library numbers that contain your IRSS destination.

Private/Public

Library Number:

IRSS Off-Site Phone Number

To enable IRSS (from remote phone providing caller ID):

1. Dial IRSS feature code #17714.

2. At the dial tone, enter the number of a Private/Public Library containing your off-site phone number.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

To cancel IRSS:

1. Dial IRSS feature code #17714.

2. At the dial tone, dial the cancellation code

8

.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Station Telephony Features

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

133 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Placing IRSS Calls:

For IRSS calls placed from phones that send Caller ID, the IRSS feature must be enabled at your Coral station. See steps below.

For IRSS calls placed from phones that do not send Caller ID information, the IRSS feature must be enabled using the

Executive Privilege feature. See

page 134

.

To place a call from IRSS phone providing Caller ID:

1. Place a call to your desk phone. Listen for the distinctive dial tone.

2. If a passcode is required (as defined by the Class of Service), enter it now.

3. At the dial tone, dial the number of the person you wish to call.

Possible destinations can be external number (stationary or cellular) or network number, or a Coral destination, including

station, trunk/trunk group, dial service, routing access, public/private library, voice mail.

If your destination is an external number, it should be preceded by the outside line access code.

You can activate any of the options described in the table on

page 136

.

To place a call from IRSS phone that does not provide Caller ID:

This applies for IRSS calls from off-site phones that do not possess a Caller ID number and, therefore, cannot be identified by the Coral.

NOTE! Some telephones may be denied the Executive Privilege feature (defined by Class Of Service).

In order to use Executive Privilege your station must be defined with a passcode.

1. Place a call to the Executive Privilege number (contact your system administrator for that number).

2. Listen for the dial tone.

3. Dial your own Coral station number.

4. Dial your four-digit passcode. Listen for the distinctive dial tone.

5. Dial the required destination number.

Station Telephony Features

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

134 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Possible destinations can be: external number (stationary or cellular), network number, or a Coral destination, including

station, trunk/trunk group, dial service, routing access, public/private library, and voice mail.

NOTE! If your destination is an external number, it should be preceded by an external line access code.

• If your destination is voice mail (IVR access code), skip to

page 138

.

• If your destination is a FlexiCall All feature, skip to

page 138

.

• To enable another IRSS phone, skip to

page 139

.

6. Listen for the ringback tone.

7. Wait for an answer.

8. You can activate any of the options described in the table

below

.

Station Telephony Features

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

135 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Options available while in an established IRSS call

Function Dial Use to:

Place a new call

Transfer call

Switch to Broker/

Consultation/3Way

Conference Call

Divert call to a Coral station

*1 Listen for a dial tone indicating that you can place a call to a new contact. Your original conversing party will be disconnected.

*2 A dial tone prompts you to enter the required transfer number. Transfer can be screened or unscreened.

To return to the original conversing party (when transfer destination is busy or does not answer) dial *2 again.

*2 A dial tone prompts you to enter the required third party number. Depending on your Class

of Service definitions, one of the following party functions will be activated (see

Broker/

Consultation/3-Way Conference call on page 137)

:

• Broker Call

• Consultation

• 3-Way

• Combination of Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call

*3 A dial tone prompts you to enter a divert number. You will be disconnected and your conversing party will be transferred to the divert number. Your number will not show on the divert party’s display.

Access voice mail/IVR

*4 For instructions on accessing voice mail from an IRSS phone, see

below

.

Call Recording/

Help Requesting

*6 Used to Start/Stop Recording outgoing calls (requires a system-wide defined Navigator application).

Or send Help request (requires a pre-selected system-wide defined keyset station), see

page 130

.

Station Telephony Features

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

136 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference call

While engaged in an established FlexiCall or IRSS call, you can use one of the options listed below, as defined by your Coral station Class of Service. See

page 201

for more information on Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference calls.

Function

Broker Call

Use to:

To activate a Broker call:

1. Dial *2

.

2. Dial the third party and wait for an answer.

3. Dial *2 to alternate between parties (any number of times).

When you hang up, the other parties will remain in conversation.

Consultation Call To activate a Consultation call:

1. Dial *2.

2. Dial the number of the person you wish to consult with.

3. When your conversation is concluded, dial *2 to return to the original call. The consulted party will be released.

3-Way Conference

Call

To activate a 3-Way Conference call:

1. Dial *2.

2. Dial the number of the person you wish to add on to the call.

3. When the party answers, dial *2 for a 3-way call.

Combination of

Broker/

Consultation/

3-Way Conference

Calls

To activate any combination of Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference calls:

1. Dial *2.

2. Dial the third party number and wait for an answer.

3. Dial *2. The third party is put on hold.

4. When you have concluded your private conversation, dial *2 to complete a 3-way Conference call.

Station Telephony Features

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

137 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

To activate Voice Mail/IVR from your IRSS phone:

You can access your voice mailbox, retrieve messages and setup voice mail options for your Coral station.

1. Place a call to your desk phone. Listen for the distinctive dial tone.

2. Dial the voice mail or IVR dial number (contact your system manager for the dial number and access code).

3. At the automated voice mail answer, dial the voice mail remote access code followed by your station number to access your station’s voice mail box.

4. Dial *4 as soon as the automated voice mail answers. This allows the system to recognize the voice mail or IVR commands.

5. Choose the required option from the voice mail or IVR menu.

NOTE! Contact your system administrator for the voice mail (IVR) dial number and voice mail remote access code. Use the table below to record that number and code:

Voice Mail (IVR) Dial

Number

Voice Mail Remote

Access Code

Station Telephony Features

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

138 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

To activate the FlexiCall All feature from your IRSS phone:

1. Place a call to your desk phone. Listen for the distinctive dial tone.

2. Dial the FlexiCall All feature code #17710.

3. At the dial tone, dial the destination number. Wait for the confirmation tone.

Possible destinations are: operator, station, network number, UNA/Central Bell or external number (stationary or

cellular) via Public/Private Speed Call Library.

To cancel the FlexiCall All feature from your IRSS phone:

1. Place a call to your desk phone. Listen for the distinctive dial tone.

2. Dial the FlexiCall All feature code #17710.

3. At the dial tone, dial the cancellation code

8

. Wait for the confirmation tone.

To enable a new IRSS phone from your present IRSS phone:

1. Place a call to your desk phone.

2. At the distinctive dial tone, dial the passcode assigned to your station.

3. At the tone, dial IRSS feature code #17714.

4. At the tone, dial the number of the private library containing the number of the remote phone to be designated as your

new IRSS phone.

5. Listen for the reorder tone. You are now disconnected. You can now access your station from your newly assigned IRSS phone.

To cancel IRSS feature from your IRSS phone:

1. Repeat Steps

1

-

3

above.

2. Dial the cancellation code

8

. The IRSS feature is deactivated at your Coral station.

Station Telephony Features

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom

139 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Malicious Call Trace

This feature records the next x (a system-defined variable) calls to your phone. A list of the calls can also be sent to a printer or terminal.

Press

[Trc]

to access the Malicious Call Trace options.

Page 1

↑→ COS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number fSet

[Trc]

Room

Page 2

Malicious Call Trace

V/X Prnt

[V/X]

Malicious Call Trace On/Off toggles the Malicious Call Trace on or off. If this feature is activated, a bullet appears next to

[V/X]

, and next to

[Trc]

on the Idle screen.

NOTE! If there are insufficient system resources for the feature to be available at your station, the message NO TRACE RECORD will be displayed.

[Prnt]

Malicious Call Trace Print sends a list of the calls to a terminal or printer. The message

CALL TRACE PRINT

appears. The listing is not deleted when printed; it may be printed later with subsequent updates.

The details recorded are: originating number (for external calls: ANI if available or trunk number if not available), your station number and the time of calls.

NOTE! Malicious Call Trace must previously be activated, or the message CALL TRACE OFF will appear and the action will not be completed.

Station Telephony Features

Malicious Call Trace

140 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Messages: Options

You can leave a message at another station and conversely, any station can leave a message at your station.

.

Press

[Msg]

to access the message options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

↓→ •

[Msg]

Log Dir Fwd

Page 2

Message Options

→ •

[Msg.] xMsg MsgW

[Msg.]

or MSG Leave Message is used to leave a message at another station, or to access messages left at your station.

Viewing and answering messages left at your station:

1. The message lamp flashes and a bullet appears next to the

[Msg]

and

[Msg.]

keys when there is a message waiting. The message consists of simple text, such as CALL SUSAN, or CALL VOICE MAIL, which is displayed on the top line.

2. Choose one of the following options after pressing

[Msg.]

or MSG:

[Prev] To view the previous message. If there is no previous message, LIST START appears on the top line.

[Next]

[Out]

[Dest]

[Canc]

[Num]

To view the next message. If there are no other messages, then LIST END appears on the top line.

To call back the message sender. The message lamp is turned off if there are no other messages. To call the

Voice Mail, see page 144

.

To leave a message at another system station, dial a station, boss group or network number, and listen for the confirmation tone.

To cancel the message and the flashing message lamp without calling back the message sender.

To briefly display the number of the person who left a message.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Options

141 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Leaving a message at another system station from idle when message list empty:

1. Press

[Msg.]

or

MSG

.

2. Press

[Dest] or

[LveMsg] and dial a station, boss group or network number.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

You will hear a reorder tone when trying to leave a message at stations not equipped with a flashing message lamp.

When your phone rings (message delivery):

1. Answer the call and check the station number displayed.

2. Deliver the relevant message.

NOTE! A message left at a Boss Group turns ON the message lamp of the first Boss Group member only.

[xMsg]

[MsgW]

Message Cancel allows you to cancel a message that you left at another station.

1. Press

[xMsg]

.

2. Dial the station, boss group or network number at which you left a message.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Message Waiting. The Attendant can use this feature to leave a message waiting indication at a busy or idle station, room or group.

Leaving a message indication at an idle station:

1. Press

[MsgW]

(Message Waiting).

2. Choose

[sRmG]

and dial a station/room/group number, or scrollf through the list using .

3. Choose

[Set]

to assign or [Canc] to deassign message.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

NOTE! A message left at a Boss Group activates the message lamp of the first member of that Boss

Group only.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Options

142 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Leaving a message indication at a busy or non-answering station:

1. Press

[MsgW]

(or press

XFER

and dial 7) when hearing the busy tone or the station does not answer.

2. Listen for the confirmation tone.

When your phone rings (message waiting delivery):

station or room # MSG. your #

MESSAGE ANSWER

↓→ DND

Mute FwdA

Your phone rings

Num

ANSWER station or room #

↓→ PgQ

Xfer Hold Mute

During message delivery

Answering a Message Waiting return call:

1. Answer the call and check the station number displayed.

2. Deliver the relevant message.

3. Message Waiting Indication for the relevant station will be cancelled automatically on answering if defined as a Hot Line,

OR

Press

[MsgW]

to cancel the Message Waiting indication.

4. Press

SPKR

or hang up to release.

NOTE! The method of canceling Message Waiting Indication is defined system-wide; Message Waiting

Return calls can be defined system-wide as Hot Lines.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Options

143 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Messages: Voice Mail

You can use the Voice Mail feature to access your personal voice messaging system. The Coral system operates a dynamic voice mail system, which guides you through retrieval and handling of your messages, as well as administration of your voice mail options, using clear and logical voice and on-screen directions. Messages are displayed in order, with the most recent listed first.

If new voice mails have arrived at your station, a message indicating the number of new voice mails is displayed on the idle screen: < xx New Vmails >, where xx indicates the number of new voice mail messages. This count is reset to zero once the Voice Mail feature has been accessed, and is not shown again until there are new messages waiting.

There are several ways to access the Voice Mail options:

• When there is a message waiting indication, press MSG key or

[Msg] [Msg.]

, then select CALL Voice Mail (where

Voice Mail

is your local voice mail site name), and choose

[Dial]

.

• Dial the Voice Mail access code (as defined by the system administrator).

Page 1

↓→

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[Msg]

Log Dir Fwd

Page 2

Message Options

[Msg.] xMsg MsgW

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

144 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[New]

[Old]

Page 3

CALL VoiceMail

↓→ Prev

Next

[Dial]

Dest

Page 4

iCMC-Main Menu

<1 New Msg>

New Old Leav fSet

New Messages can be played, deleted, archived and redirected (see below).

Old Messages can be played, deleted, archived and redirected (see below).

Page 5

01/02 New 10:00 10/10 2006 caller name caller #

↓→ Next

Play Dele Arch

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

145 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

New and Old Message Options

Note that functions may operate differently before, during and after playback (as explained below).

Before/After Playback:

[Next]

/

[Prev]

Next/Previous displays the next/previous message header in the list.

[Play]

/

[Repl]

Play/Replay is used to hear the current message.

[Dele]

Delete is used to erase the current message from your message box. The next message header in the list is displayed.

[Arch]

[Repl]

[Redi]

[Back]

Archive is used to save the current message in your archive list. The next message header in the list is displayed.

Reply (appears when scrolling to the second feature options line) is used to send a message to the caller who left the original message, where the caller is a station with a voice message box.

Redirect is used to send the current message to another station.

Back is used to return to the previous menu.

During Playback:

[Next]

/

[Prev]

Next/Previous plays the next/previous message in the list.

[Dly]

[Rewi]

Pause is used to interrupt the message during playback.

Press

[Resume] to continue the message from where you left off, or press

[Back]

to return to the previous menu.

Rewind is used to backtrack the currently playing message by four seconds. Press again to rewind an additional four seconds, and so on.

[FFwd]

[Del]

[Arch]

[Reply][Repl]

Fast Forward is used to track the currently playing message forward by four seconds. Press again to fast forward an additional four seconds, and so on.

Delete is used to erase the current message from your message box. The next message in the list is played.

Archive is used to save the current message in your archive list. The next message in the list is played.

Reply(appears when scrolling to the second feature options line) is used to send a message to the caller who left the original message, where the caller is a station with a voice message box.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

146 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Leav]

[Redi]

[Back]

Redirect is used to send the current message to another station.

Back is used to return to the previous menu.

Leave Message is used to leave a message at another system station. Dial a station, boss group or network number, and listen for the confirmation tone.

[fSet]

[SysM]

Setup directs you to the Setup Menu. See

Voice Mail: Setup Options on page 148

.

System Manager Options Menu. For authorized users only. See

Voice Mail: System Manager Options on page 154

.

[Exit]

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

The following options are available from the Exit Menu:

[Quit]

Quit exits the Voice Mail system.

[Main]

[Back]

Main accesses the Voice Mail Main Menu.

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

147 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Curr]

[Swit]

[Stdr]

[Busy]

[Alt]

[Back]

Voice Mail: Setup Options

Press

[fSet]

from the Voice Mail menu to access the Voice Mail setup options. At each stage of the setup process, follow the audible directions given.

[Gree] iCMC-Setup Options

< 1 New Msg >

Tran Deli

↓→ Gree

Grou

Greetings Menu. You may record a number of personal greetings for your mailbox. Along with a standard greeting, you may also record an alternate greeting for use during holidays, weekends, or time away from the office. When provided by your system setup, you may also record a busy or internal greeting, which is used in conjunction with the standard greeting.

iCMC-Setup Greetings

< 1 New Msg >

Swit Stdr

↓→ Curr

Busy

Current Greeting enables you to change the active current greeting, and rerecord the standard and busy or alternate greetings.

Switch Greeting enables you to select between the standard and alternate greetings to be used as the current greeting.

Standard Greeting enables you to record the standard voice mail greeting.

Busy Greeting enables you to record, activate or deactivate the greeting played when your station is busy.

Alternate Greeting enables you to record the alternate greeting (designed for when you are on holiday, away from the office, etc).

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

148 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Exit]

[Tran]

[[Enab]

[Back]

[Exit]

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

Transfer Options Menu. You may change the transfer or call handling options for your mailbox. There are two call transfer menus that can be displayed. One menu is displayed if call transfer to your extension is enabled, and the other is displayed if call transfer is disabled.

The following menu options are available when call transfer to your extension is disabled.

iCMC-Transfer Options

< 1 New Msg >

Back Exit

Enab

Enable allows you to transfer to your extension and go to the Enabled menu.

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

The following menu options are available when call transfer to your extension is disabled.

[Disa]

[Chg#]

[Scre] iCMC-Transfer Options

< 1 New Msg >

Chg# Scre

↓→ Disa

Hold

Disable allows you to disable transfer to your extension and go to the Disabled menu.

Change Transfer Number enables you to change the number of the extension to which calls are transferred (e.g. your voice mail box number or co-worker’s extension).

Call Screening is used to define whether callers are asked to record their name before the call is transferred. The person who receives the transfer will hear “Call from <name>”.

NOTE! If the person to whom the call is transferred rejects the call, or is not available, the recorded name is not saved.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

149 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Hold]

[Deli]

[Back]

[Exit]

[Work]

[Home]

[Page]

[Spar]

[Back]

[Exit]

Call Holding defines whether callers have the option to wait on hold if the extension is busy, or to be automatically transferred to the voice mail.

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

Delivery Options Menu. Your station has four Voice Mail notification delivery numbers. These numbers are called Work, Home, Pager, and Spare. If enabled for use, the voice mail system will attempt to deliver notification of any messages left for you to these numbers during programmed time periods.

There are three visual menus associated with the delivery phone numbers. One menu selects the phone to be edited, one menu shows the options available when the phone is disabled, and one menu shows the options available when the phone is enabled.

The following menu options are available to select the delivery phone to be edited.

iCMC-Delivery Options

< 1 New Msg >

Home Page

↓→ Work

Work enables you to go to the Work phone edit menu.

Home enables you to go to the Home phone edit menu.

Pager enables you to go to the Pager edit menu.

Spare enables you to go to the Spare phone edit menu.

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

Spar

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

150 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

The following menu options are available once a delivery phone has been selected and delivery is disabled.

iCMC-Delivery Options

< 1 New Msg >

↓→ Enab

Back Exit

[[Enab]

[Back]

[Exit]

Enable Delivery is used to activate delivery of Voice Mail notifications to the phone selected and go to the

Enabled menu for that phone.

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

The following menu options are available once a delivery phone has been selected and delivery is enabled.

[Disa]

[Ph.#]

[Sche]

[Urge]

Work Phone

< 1 New Msg >

Ph.# Sche

↓→ Disa

Urge

Disable Delivery allows you to disable message delivery for the currently selected phone and go to the delivery phone disabled menu.

Phone Number enables you to edit the number of the delivery phone.

Delivery Schedule enables you to change the time period during which the message will be delivered to this phone.

Delivery Mode enables you to change the delivery mode setting to:

Each (sends a notification for every message received); OR

Urgent (sends a notification for all urgent messages received).

NOTE! A separate notification is sent for each message.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

151 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Grou]

[Back]

[Exit]

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

Groups Menu. You may own message groups in the voice mail system. The following menu options are available to edit message groups in the system.

[Pers]

[Crea]

[Edit]

[List]

[Dele]

[Back]

[Exit] iCMC-Group Options

< 1 New Msg >

Edit List

↓→ Crea

Dele

Create Group enables you to create a new message group.

Edit Group enables you to edit an existing message group.

List Groups enables you to hear a list of all message groups.

Delete Group enables you to delete an existing message group.

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

Personal Options Menu. Your personal options control how you are listed in the voice mail system. The following menu options are available to edit personal subscriber settings.

NOTE! Both Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) input and soft key button presses are valid from this menu.

[Code]

[SpNa]

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

↓→ Code iCMC-Personal Options

< 1 New Msg >

SpNa Dir

Security Code enables you to change or delete your security code.

Spelled Name enables you to change the spelling of your name in the voice mail system.

152

RcNa

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Dir]

[RcNa]

[Emai]

Directory Listing enables you to include or remove your name from the directory list.

Recorded Name enables you to change your recorded name.

Email enables the system to deliver notification of any messages left for you to an email address.

[Back]

[Exit]

NOTE! Email notification is only available for email integration packages (e.g. Novell GroupWish,

Lotus cc:Mail).

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

153 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Voice Mail: System Manager Options

[SysM]

System Manager Options. You may have access to System Manager options, dependent upon your administrative settings. The following menu options are available to edit system manager settings.

NOTE! Both Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) input and soft key button presses are valid from this menu.

[ChgB]

[Gree]

[Sche]

[Info]

[Oper]

[Back]

[Exit] iCMC-System Manager Options

< 1 New Msg >

Gree Sche Info

↓→ ChgB

Change Mailbox enables you to add, edit or delete mailboxes, and to delete user passcodes.

System Greetings enables you to record system greetings.

System Schedule enables you to edit the system schedule and system time.

System Information enables you to listen to system information, including system ID, number of active ports, voice board driver versions, current time, software version and total recorded time in the system.

Operator Settings enables you to modify the operator box settings and fax options (including fax number).

Back returns to the previous menu display.

Exit directs you to the Exit Menu.

Station Telephony Features

Messages: Voice Mail

154 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Mute Microphone

During a conversation you may need to temporarily turn off the microphone on your telephone (handset and speakerphone).

This will prevent the other party from hearing a portion of your conversation. The MUTE key is an on/off switch and can be pressed as many times as necessary.

The mute feature deactivates the microphone for your speakerphone and handset or headset. Press the toggle key again to reactivate the microphone.

To turn off the microphone during a call:

• Press MUTE.

Party cannot hear your side of the conversation.

A bullet appears to the left of

[Mute]

and MUTE LED is lit red.

To return to 2-way conversation:

• Press the lit MUTE.

Station Telephony Features

Mute Microphone

155 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Page Queue

Page Queue allows you to park a call (up to ten calls can be multi-parked simultaneously) on designated Page_Q numbers by sending the call to one of ten Page Queue destinations. Once parked, a call can be either retrieved at another station or you can page someone else to pick up the call at any station or group of stations. You can page any system member from your phone and announce that there is a call for Mr. Doe on Page Queue Line x. The call can be picked up from any system station by dialing the Page Queue access code (default access codes are 7060-7069).

NOTE! To pick up the call, Mr. Doe should dial from any station to the relevant Page-Queue number

(default numbers 7060-7069). If the call is not picked up within a predetermined time, it will automatically return to the originating station from which Page Queue was placed.

The party placed on Page Queue may hear one of the following: music, recorded tone, busy tone or no sound at all, as defined system-wide for each Page Queue.

To place a call in Page Queue:

,

1. While on a call, press

[PgQ]

to access the Page Queue options

Page 1 EXT ANS 2nd party

↓→

[Pg Q]

Xfer Hold Mute

Page 2 Page_Q Place/Pickup

↓→ PgQ1

PgQ2 PgQ3 PgQ4

2. Press a free

[PgQx]

(ten options see

Table on page 159

) to send the call to Page Queue number x.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Station Telephony Features

Page Queue

156 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

4. Announce that there is a call on Page_Q line x.

Using available communication means notify another user to pick up the call.

Usually announcing a call for pick up includes the name of the person being notified and the relevant Page_Q number.

NOTES! You can use one of the following methods to announce a call:

• Make a public address over PA speakers (see

page 160

).

• Voice page a specific station (see

page 161 ).

• Voice page a group of stations (see page 163 ).

To pick up a call placed in Page Queue (from any station):

1. Lift the handset of any telephone.

2. Dial assigned Page_Q access code (7060-7069, see

Table on page 159

).

3. Begin speaking.

To pick up a call placed in Page Queue (from Page Queue originating station):

,

1. Press

• [PgQ]

to access the Page Queue options.

Page 1 10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ •

[Pg Q]

Remd PkUp Camp

Page 2 Page_Q Place/Pickup

↓→ PgQ1

PgQ2 PgQ3 PgQ4

2. Press the relevant lit

• [PgQx]

(ten options see

Table on page 159

) to retrieve the call from Page Queue number x.

3. Begin speaking.

Station Telephony Features

Page Queue

157 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Return Call:

If the call is not picked up within a predetermined time, it will automatically return to the originating station from which Page

Queue was placed.

1. Press SPKR or pick up the handset to answer.

2. Begin speaking.

NANS

DND page Q dial# 2nd party#

Mute FwdA Num

Station Telephony Features

Page Queue

158 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Page Queue - Access Codes

Page queue

Number

Soft Key Access Code

(Dial Pad#)

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

[PgQ1]

[PgQ2]

[PgQ3]

[PgQ4]

[PgQ5]

[PgQ6]

[PgQ7]

[PgQ8]

[PgQ9]

[PQ10]

7060

7061

7062

7063

7064

7065

7066

7067

7068

7069

Station Telephony Features

Page Queue

159 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Paging: Announcing, Public Address

When a public address system is attached to the Coral system, use this feature to announce a message over your system’s

Public Address (PA) speakers.

Use the form

below

to write in locations and their associated access codes.

Paging a message over public address:

1. Press

PAGE XXXX

DSS key or dial PA access code.

2. Announce your message.

3. Press

SPKR

or hang up to release.

NOTE! See

Programming: Feature Keys on page 167 for instructions on how to program a DSS key.

3.

4.

1.

2.

5.

6.

PA Paging - Access Codes

Area/Location Access Code

7074

7075

7076

7077

7078

7079

Station Telephony Features

Paging: Announcing, Public Address

160 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Paging: Voice Paging

This feature enables you to voice page another keyset (FlexSet, FlexSet-IP, DKT, T207M or T208M) from your phone.

Essentially this feature is an intercom allowing persons to converse between stations, or can be employed as a simple pager.

Press

[VPg]

to access the Voice Page feature.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ Park

[VPg]

WPg SM

Page 2

VOICE PAGE

***** Enter Destination ****

Voice Paging a single keyset station:

When Busy:

• Press

[VPg]

upon reaching a busy keyset station to send a message to the other party that they are being paged.

When Unanswered:

• Press

[VPg]

upon hearing the ringback tone at unanswered keyset station. The call will automatically connect.

From Idle:

1. Press

[VPg]

.

2. Dial a keyset station number.

3. Listen for the Voice Page tone and begin speaking.

NOTE! When you hear reorder tone and DNT DIS VP message appears, the station is protected from receiving voice page calls. (See Voice Page Receive on

page 240

for configuration instructions.)

Station Telephony Features

Paging: Voice Paging

161 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Answering a Voice Page:

1. Listen for the voice page (warbling) tone (see

Ring Type on page 247

for configuration instructions).

2. If you are in a conversation, either place the call on hold or hang up, then continue with the following steps:

When Auto Answer is Defined, see

Setup on page 238

:

• When the tone stops, the voice page automatically connects through the speaker.

Converse hands-free, or lift the handset for private conversation.

When Manual Answer is Defined, see

Setup on page 238

:

• Press the flashing

SPKR

key or lift the handset.

Station Telephony Features

Paging: Voice Paging

162 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Paging: Zone Page

Use this feature to page a pre-programmed group of keysets (FlexSet, FlexSet-IP, DKT, T207M or T208M) within a zone, area or dispersed within your company. The entire group can be paged by dialing the Zone Page access code (default dial numbers: 7300 to 7309).

Use the form

below

to write in the various paging zones or areas in your company and their associated access codes.

Sending a Zone Page:

1. Dial the Zone Page Access Code or press a pre-programmed DSS key with the Access Code number.

(See

Programming: Feature Keys on page 167

for instructions on how to program a DSS key.)

2. Announce your message to the group.

3. Disconnect when you finish announcing.

NOTE! See your system administrator to view or define the zone group access codes and their respective members.

Area/Location

Zone Paging - Access Codes

Access Code

7300

7301

7302

7303

7304

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Area/Location Access Code

7305

7306

7307

7308

7309

Station Telephony Features

Paging: Zone Page

163 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Park

During a call, use Park to place the second party on hold at your station so that it can be picked-up at another station. The

[Park] soft key is shown with a bullet next to it, indicating that a call has been parked at your station. The parked party hears music or a tone (system-defined).

Press

[Park]

to Park a call, or to retrieve from Park.

Parking a Call:

1. While on a call press

[Park]

.

2. Listen for the confirmation tone.

The call goes into Park and

LOOP

flashes at your station. Your station is free to make other calls.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[Park]

VPg WPg SM

Page 2

CALL PARK Name

Next Conn

Retrieving a Parked Call (from any station):

1. Lift the handset of any telephone.

2. Press

[Park]

or dial Park feature code #183.

Station Telephony Features

Park

164 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

3. Dial the station number at which the call was parked. If more than one party has been placed on Park, scroll between names by using

[Next]

.

4. Begin speaking.

Retrieving a Parked Call (from the originating station where the call was parked):

Press the flashing

LOOP

,

LINE

, or DSS key and begin speaking.

OR

1. Press

[Park]

.

2. Choose

[Conn]

or dial the activation code

9

. If more than one party has been placed on Park, scroll between names by using

[Next]

.

3. Begin speaking.

Return Call:

If the parked call is not picked up within a predetermined time (system-defined timeout), the call will automatically return to the originating station from which the park was made.

1. Press SPKR or pick up the handset to answer.

2. Begin speaking.

RECALL 2nd party#

DND Mute FwdA Num

NOTE! More than one call can be parked at a single station, but calls are retrieved on a first-in, first-out basis (FIFO). That is, the first parked call (first-in) will be the first call that is picked up (first-out).

However, if multi-parking is required it is recommended that the Page Queue feature be used

instead (see Page Queue on page 156) .

Station Telephony Features

Park

165 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Phone Lock

Use this feature to prevent unauthorized persons from using your phone line. Incoming calls may still be answered.

Press

[Lock]

to lock your phone.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ GpCl

ACD

[Lock]

Exec

Page 2

PHONE UNLOCK

ENTER PASSCODE

Page 3

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

UnLock

Locking/unlocking your phone:

1. Press

[Lock]

or

[Unlock]

.

2. Dial your four-digit passcode number. To define your passcode, see

Setup: Passcode

on

page 242

.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

4. When your phone is locked, all outbound dialing is prohibited, and phone features are not accessible. The only soft key to appear is

[Unlock]

– pressing it prompts you to enter your passcode. Attempting to dial a number or access a feature results in the PHONE LOCKED message being displayed.

Station Telephony Features

Phone Lock

166 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming: Feature Keys

The phone comes equipped with 9 system-defined (fixed) keys as well as user programmable keys. You are able to program most of the programmable keys from the phone itself.

There are four user programmable keys for the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL (see

page 4

and

page 6

), and up

to 48 with an optional TEM expansion module (see

page 5

and

page 7

).

Press

[fSet] [Prog]

to access the Key Programming options.

Page 1

COS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[fSet]

Trc Room

Page 2

Feature Setup

→ Pass

[Prog]

Page 3

PROGRAM

SELECT BUTTON.

Prev Next

Pref Lib

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

167 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

The programmable buttons may include either dial numbers (stations, groups, trunks, trunk groups, etc.) or Coral feature activation codes. Several dial commands, in a series, may be programmed into one programmable key - useful for one-button speed dialing, voice response and voice mail system access, and other complex dialing patterns.

The T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL phone includes four programmable buttons, each with a green LED indicator. The TEM expansion module may be attached to the phone and offers 44 additional programmable buttons. The

TEM consists of two columns of 11 programmable buttons each, which are doubled by using the Shift Left key or Shift Right key.

For example, the top right button may include content AAA while the same button, when Shift Right precedes it, may contain content BBB. The same follows for the left sided buttons preceded by Shift Left.

To facilitate TEM button programming and labeling, you can print out the form on

page 170

. Use the form to manually enter

the corresponding TEM key names.

NOTE! Since each TEM button can include two separate text entries (one entry is activated when pressing the adjacent Shift key), the text you enter closest to the button is the one that appears when the Shift key is not used. Likewise, the text furthest from the button is the one that appears when the Shift key is used.

Features keys can be programmed exactly as they are programmed in the FlexSet series keysets.

Use the following guide to navigate through this topic:

Programming Feature Keys

........................................................page 171

Programming Boss Group Line Keys

.........................................page 172

Programming ELA Group Line Keys

..........................................page 173

Programming Keys: Examples

...................................................page 174

Programming: Button Labeling

...................................................page 176

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

..........................................page 267

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

168 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Activating Programmable Keys on the TEM Expansion Module

TEM

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

MSG XFER

CONF

REDIAL

DIR HOLD

HEADSET MUTE

SPKR

SHIFT

Programmable Keys

169

Shift Left

Shift Right

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

15

14

13

18

17

16

21

20

19

23

22

TEM Programmable Keys Form

28

27

26

25

24

32

31

30

29

34

33

43

42

41

40

45

44

37

36

39

38

35

SHIFT

54

53

52

56

55

51

50

47

46

49

48

SHIFT (left)

170

Shift (right)

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming Feature Keys

To Program Feature Keys:

1. Press

[Prog]

.

2. Press the DSS/Feature key you wish to program.

3. Dial the numbers exactly as you would normally to enable the feature or to speed dial.

4. If the button is already programmed, the contents appear on the system lines.

5. Press the DSS/Feature key again to save the contents to memory.

To View Programmed Key Contents:

1. Press

[Prog]

.

2. Press programmed key.

3. View contents on system lines.

4. If the length of the number exceeds the display size, press

[Next]

to scroll through additional digits.

5. Press

SPKR

to release.

To Delete Programmed Key Contents:

1. Press

[Prog]

.

2. Press the programmed key.

3. View contents on system lines.

4. Press

[Prev]

.

5. Press the programmed key again to delete.

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

171 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming Boss Group Line Keys

Each phone in a Boss Group can be programmed with up to six line keys. The use of programmed line keys assists in defining the various ways in which a Boss Group can answer incoming calls. To learn about the different uses of Boss line keys, see

Boss Groups on page 67

.

To Program Line Keys:

1. Press

[Prog]

.

2. Press the

LINE NN

DSS key you wish to program.

3. Dial Boss LINE feature code (default dial number: #126).

4. Dial the Boss Line number (

00

= first line,

01

= second line, etc. up to 05). Two digits must be entered.

5. Dial the Boss Group number.

6. Press the selected

LINE NN

DSS key again.

7. Press

SPKR

to release.

NOTE! Do not perform the above steps if your phone has a button preprogrammed with a number of the trunk reserved for your Boss Group. This button will be used as a line key.

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

172 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming ELA Group Line Keys

Each phone in an ELA Group can be programmed with up to 32 ELA line keys. To learn about the different uses of ELA line keys, see

ELA (Extension Line Appearance) on page 103

.

To Program ELA Line Keys:

1. Press

[Prog]

.

2. Press the

LINE NN

DSS key you want to program.

3. Dial the ELA LINE feature code (default dial number: #17718).

4. Dial the ELA Group number (main ELA station number).

5. Dial the Ring State digit, as follows (one digits must be entered):

[3]

- Delay ringing after a system-defined timeout period.

[6]

- No ring upon receiving an ELA Group call.

[9]

- Yes immediately ring upon receiving an ELA Group call.

6. Dial the ELA Line number (

00

= first line,

01

= second line, etc. up to 31). Two digits must be entered.

7. Press the selected

LINE NN

DSS key again.

8. Press

SPKR

to release.

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

173 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming Keys: Examples

Key

Contents

Key Description Procedure/Example

DSS

(Direct Station

Selection)

Permits you to make or transfer a call to an extension or trunk by using a defined key, and provides a busy lamp indication for stations or trunks programmed under a DSS key.

To program a DSS key for extension 4577:

Press [Prog], press the key you wish to program and then the extension number 4577. To conclude, press the key again.

Single feature Permits you to activate or cancel a single Coral

Series of features feature.

Permits you to program a series of features under a single key; useful for one-button speed dialing, voice response and voice mail system access, and other complex dialing procedures. The

SPKR

code

#120 must be programmed between each successive feature sequence.

To program a key to turn the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature on and off: Press [Prog], press the key you wish to program and then the feature code #145. To conclude, press the key again.

To program a key to simultaneously turn off the DND and transfer all calls to a library number programmed for voice mail:

Press [Prog], press the key you wish to program and then the feature code #145. Dial twice, in succession,

SPKR code #120. Enter feature code #141 7000 (an example of a library number). To conclude, press the key again.

NOTE! In order for this to work properly, one of the two

features must be previously activated.

Feature key without confirmation tone or display

Permits you to activate or cancel a feature or series of features without hearing a confirmation tone or seeing a display. The

SPKR

code #120 must be programmed twice after each successive feature sequence.

Follow the directions above and dial twice, in succession, SPKR code #120 after library code 7000.

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

174 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Key

Contents

Key Description Procedure/Example

Series of features with

LED indication

Outside telephone number

(Speed Key)

Permits you to activate or cancel a series of features with the LED being controlled by the key pressing order. When the key is pressed the first time, the LED will light and the features will be activated. When the key is pressed again, the LED will be extinguished, regardless of the current state of the features.

NOTE! The LED On/Off feature code #1301 must

be programmed before the first feature code is entered in order to function properly.

To program a key to simultaneously turn on both the

DND and idle display features:

Press [Prog], press the key you wish to program and then the LED On/Off feature code #1301 and feature code #145. Dial twice, in succession, SPKR code

#120. Enter feature code #137. To conclude, press the key again.

• Permits you to program a key to dial an outside telephone number.

To program a key to dial (914)354-8132 over trunk group 9:

Press [Prog], press the key you wish to program and then enter the trunk group number (9) followed by the area code 914 and the number 3548132. To conclude, press the key again.

XDA (External

Destination

Appearance)

Permits you to program a DSS key to provide a common line appearance of external destinations for Boss Group members. When the external destination calls into the Boss Group, its Public

Library key lights at all the boss group member’s stations.

Program each Boss Group member with a DSS key containing the reserved Public Library number for the external destination.

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Feature Keys

175 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming: Button Labeling

The phone

includes a removable vinyl overlay for the programmable buttons on the phone as well as on the TEM expansion module, enabling the user to label the buttons.

The DESI

 Plus Labeling System is used to label the buttons on the phone. DESI Plus is a user-friendly and powerful telephone designation strip program, which allows an office printer to quickly create labels custom-designed for various phones.

The phone comes with a blank DESI label inserted beneath the vinyl overlay. Additional blank DESI Labels may be purchased from your dealer in letter or A4 sized paper. The sheets of peel-off stickers are provided to label the phone buttons with names and phone numbers. To choose the appropriate label sheet layout designated for the specific phone model, refer to the table below.

Use DESI software downloaded from the manufacturer’s site: http://www.tadirantele.com/products_terminals.asp

or from the

DESI site: http://www.desi.com

to print the labels from your computer. Follow the online download instructions.

Phone Model

Label Sheet Catalog #

Letter,

(8 ½ x 11”)

A4

7744-7300066 7744-7300067 4 buttons

Details

T207M, T208M,

T207M/NP, T208M/BL

TEM 7744-7300068 7744-7300069 22 buttons

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Button Labeling

176 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Printing the multi-designation label:

• Use the DESI software to select the layout of your multi-designation label (as described on the previous page)

• Enter the button content names per button location

• Load the label sheet into the printer tray

• From the DESI Plus/DESI Lite menu, choose File > Print

To place labels:

1. Create and print the labels using the DESI software.

2. Remove the vinyl overlay with a paper clip, refer to figure below.

3. Affix your new button label/s.

4. Replace the vinyl overlay.

Lift up using a paperclip to remove flexible vinyl overlay

Button labelling for T207M & T207M/NP with TEM

Lift up using a paperclip to remove flexible vinyl overlay

Button labelling for T208M & T208M/BL

Station Telephony Features

Programming: Button Labeling

177 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Recording a Call

This feature allows you to start recording while in conversation with a second party, 3-way or multi-party conference. It is operated while the current call is in progress, without disrupting the call.

The Coral system must be equipped with a uCMC, iCMC, CMC, WiCMC or CMC for Windows.

The feature is activated by pressing a toggle RECORD key (a programmed HELP key with APDL as the destination). The

RECORD key is used as a trigger for a predefined destination (APDL) to start recording the call to the user’s voicemail box.

Programming a Record key:

1. Press

[fSet] [Prog]

.

2. Choose and press the DSS key.

3. Dial HELP feature access code (default dial number: #1443).

4. Dial the destination APDL.

5. Press the selected DSS key again.

To Start Recording the Call:

1. During a call, in order to record the conversation, press the RECORD DSS key and continue the call.

2. Recording starts when the RECORD key LED flashes.

To Stop Recording the Call:

• During a call that is already being recorded, press the RECORD DSS key again to end the recording.

Station Telephony Features

Recording a Call

178 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Redial

Redialing options are accessed by pressing

[Redl]

from idle state.

Page 1

→ DND

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

FlxC

[Redl]

PgQ

[Last]

[Save]

[ARdl]

Page 2

Redial Numbers

Last Save ARdl

Last Number Redial is used to redial the last number (most recent number) dialed from this phone. You can also press REDIALto redial the most recent number.

Saved Number Redial is used to redial an outside number that you have stored in memory.

A number can be saved during a conversation, when you hear a busy tone, or when the dialed number is not answered by choosing

[Save]

.

NOTE! As opposed to Last Number Redial, the saved number will remain in memory until another number is saved by repeating the above procedure.

Auto Redial is used to repeatedly redial an outside number that is busy. More than one number can be stored in the Auto Redial list. A number can be entered for auto redialing either when you hear the busy tone when

making an external call (see

Upon Hearing Busy Tone on page 44)

, or upon hearing ringback (see

Upon

Hearing Ringback Tone on page 42)

, or from idle before making an external call (see

below

). The number will be redialed until the external phone rings, or up to a system-defined number of attempts, before the number is erased from the Auto Redial list.

Station Telephony Features

Redial

179 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Activating Auto Redial from idle (before making an external call):

1. Press

[ARdl]

.

2. Dial the required outside line access code or press the relevant preprogrammed outside line key.

Possible outside line access codes are trunk number, trunk group number, routing access, dial service, private/public

library number, last number redial code, or saved number code.

3. Dial the outside number.

4. Press

[Enbl]

.

The number will now automatically redial at timed intervals. When the called party answers, press the flashing

SPKR

key or lift the handset to enable conversation.

Once Auto Redial has been activated, the following options appear in idle state after pressing

[ARdl]

. The features in the following table affect all numbers in the redial list.

To Press Display Message Feature

Key LED

Comments

Cancel

Freeze

[CanA] AUTO REDIAL /

LIST EMPTY

[FrzA] HOLD SET

Off Deletes all numbers in the redial list. A confirmation tone is heard.

Flashing Ceases all automatic dialing. Confirmation tone is heard.

On Re-enables dialing of the "Frozen" numbers.

Restart

(release from freeze)

Add

[RstA] /

SPKR

HOLD REMOVED

[Add] On Adds another external number to the redial list.

Press

[Next]

and

[Prev]

to scroll through the redial list. When the required number is found the Auto Redial features (see table below) can be directly activated for the selected number. Press

SPKR

to exit.

Station Telephony Features

Redial

180 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

To

Select a saved redial number

Enable

Press Display Message Feature

Key LED

On [Next] /

[Prev]

REP DIAL # nn tttt dddddddddd

[Enbl] /

SPKR

[xFrz] REP DIAL # nn

HOLD REMOVED

On

Comments

Selects the next or previous number in the redial list.

Exits the redial feature and returns to normal keyset operation.

Re-enables dialing of the selected number.

Restart

(release from freeze)

Immediately

Dial

Cancel

Freeze

[Dial] CONFIRMED On Confirms the selected number and immediately dials.

Assign Priority

(double redial cycle)

Cancel Priority

[Canc]

[vFrz] REP DIAL # nn h

HOLD SET

[vPri] REP DIAL # nn P

PRIORITY SET

On Deletes the selected number.

Flashing Ceases dialing the selected number.

On Increases the redialing rate for a selected number.

[xPri] REP DIAL # nn

PRIORITY REMOVED

On Remove Priority - Returns selected number to standard redial cycle.

nn

= serial number (01, 02, 03…), tttt = outside line access code or name, dddd = external telephone number

NOTE! It is recommended that you program a feature key to make the most out of the Auto Redial feature. To program an Auto Redial feature key, see

Programming: Feature Keys on page 167 .

Default Auto Redial access code: #178.

Station Telephony Features

Redial

181 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Relay (Accessory)

You can switch a relay on or off in order to activate certain external devices, such as external alarm, or electric lock. These devices are installed by your company. Use the form below to write down the types of external devices and their associated codes that are installed.

Activating/deactivating Relay:

1. Dial the Relay Code (Default Dial Numbers: 7086 to 7091).

2. Choose

[Set]

to turn relay on;

OR

Choose [Canc] to turn relay off.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Relay Codes

External Device

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

Relay

Access Code

7086

7087

7088

7089

7090

7091

Station Telephony Features

Relay (Accessory)

182 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Reminder

Use this feature to set, review, or cancel reminders, which will ring your phone at a designated time. You can set reminders to ring your phone at one or more designated times. If you do not answer the call, the phone will ring three more times at one minute intervals. More than one reminder can be programmed. Press

[Remd]

to access the Reminder menu.

Page 1

→ PgQ

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[Remd]

PkUp Camp

Page 2

REMINDER 12:00PM

New Next Canc

Entering a Reminder request:

1. Press

[Remd]

.

2. Enter the time you wish to be called at the ENTER TIME prompt.

Note that four digits are required for a 12-hr clock: (i.e. 0805 for 8:05)

3. Choose

[AM]

or

[PM]

.

•To add another Reminder time, choose

[New]

and continue with step

2

above.

•To scroll through the Reminder list, press

[Next]

.

•To cancel the selected Reminder time (displayed on the top line), choose [Canc].

Station Telephony Features

Reminder

183 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

When Reminder call rings:

When the phone rings, the REMIN message appears on the top line indicating that this is a reminder call. Press

SPKR

to answer the call; the ANSWER REMIN message appears on the top line. Choose one of the following:

1. Press

[Snz]

to have the system call you again later (after a system-defined time period).

2. Press

SPKR

again to cancel the reminder.

Station Telephony Features

Reminder

184 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Room Status

Used to turn the Room Status definition of your station on or off. There are 16 different Room Status definitions. Use the

Table on page 186

to write in the various room statuses and related access codes available at your telephone.

This feature is applicable for Hotel/Motel use. In cases where this is required, specific instructions will be given.

NOTE! Check with your system administrator whether your Coral system supports the Room Status or

Canned Messages feature. If your Coral system supports the Canned Messages feature (see

page 87 ), the Room Status feature is unavailable.

Press

[Room]

to access the Room Status options.

Page 1

↑→ COS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number fSet Trc

[Room]

[RSx]

Page 2

Room Status

↓→ RS0

RS1 RS2 RS3

Press the required Room Status soft key (

[RSx]

where x= 0 to 15, see

Table on page 88

) to activate. The status

definition appears on the top line. When activated, a bullet is shown next to

[RSx]

, and next to

[Room] on the idle screen.

To cancel, press the relevant lit

• [RSx]

key again.

Station Telephony Features

Room Status

185 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Room Status

Number

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

7

8

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

[RS7]

[RS8]

[RS9]

[RS10]

[RS11]

[RS12]

[RS13]

[RS15]

[RS15]

[RS0]

[RS1]

[RS2]

[RS3]

[RS4]

[RS5]

[RS6]

Room Status - Names and User Access Codes

Soft Key Access Code

(Dial Pad#)

7033

7034

7035

7036

7037

7038

7039

7040

7041

7026

7027

7028

7029

7030

7031

7032

Name

Station Telephony Features

Room Status

186 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Series Call

Series is used to mark an external call before transferring it to a third party. This causes the call to return to you after the third party hangs up. This feature can only be used during conversation.

Marking a call as a Series Call:

1. During conversation, press

[Ser]

to mark the call.

2. Listen for the confirmation tone.

3. Transfer the call when you are ready.

The marked call will now return to you after the third party has hung up.

NOTE! Should you try to mark a call that has already been marked the error message ALREADY SET will appear.

When your telephone rings (third party hangs up):

1. The call will return to you with the SERIES message displayed.

2. Answer the call as normal when your station rings.

3. Ask calling party if transfer to another party is required; or

Set up the call as a series call; or Hang up.

Station Telephony Features

Series Call

187 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Silent Monitoring

This feature enables an authorized (COS and AUTHORIZATION) user to monitor and/or record (may require additional hardware) any system port, station, trunk, etc. in any state (except data and conference), without audio or visual warning to the monitored party. While monitoring a port, your telephone returns a busy signal for all incoming calls.

The volume can be adjusted using the VOL

+

/

-

buttons whilst monitoring, and you can whisper by pressing

[WPg]

.

Press

[SM]

to access the Silent Monitoring options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ Park

VPg WPg

[SM]

Page 2

Silent Monitoring

↓→ SM1

SM2

Station Telephony Features

Silent Monitoring

188 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[SM1]

[SM2]

1-Way Split Silent Monitoring is used to monitor either side of a 2-way conversation separately. Only one of the conversing parties can be heard at any one time. This feature can be activated from idle only, as follows:

1. Press

[SM1]

.

2. At the prompt, dial the station number of the original destination (1 st

party), then:

• To monitor the 1 st

conversing party, choose

[Orig] or dial the cancellation code

8

• To monitor the 2 nd

conversing party, choose

[Prtn]

or dial the activation code

9

• To cancel Split Silent Monitor, press

SPKR

or hang up.

NOTE! If you hear the reorder tone when attempting to monitor a call, the port is SECURED against monitoring.

2-Way Silent Monitoring is used to monitor both sides of a 2-way conversation simultaneously. This feature can be activated from idle, or while attempting to call a busy or non-answering destination.

NOTE! This feature requires a CNSsl card, an 8DRCF, an 8DRCM card or a CNF card to be installed in the system. When a CNF card is installed, it must be defined as C3-WAY.

Station Telephony Features

Silent Monitoring

189 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Operating from idle:

1. Press

[SM2]

.

2. At the prompt, dial the station number.

Options available while monitoring:

• To cancel 2-way Silent Monitor, press

[Abort]

,

SPKR

or hang up.

• To whisper to the 1 st

party, press

[WPg]

.

Operating upon hearing busy or ringback tone:

1. Dial the station.

2. Upon hearing busy or ringback tone, press

[SM2]

.

OR

Press

[Xfer]

and dial 9.

Options available while monitoring:

• To cancel 2-way Silent Monitor, press

[Abort]

,

SPKR

or hang up.

• To whisper to the 1 st

party, press

[WPg]

.

NOTE! If you hear the reorder tone when attempting to monitor a call either the port is protected against monitoring (SECURED) or All conference card ports are engaged (NO RESOURCE).

Station Telephony Features

Silent Monitoring

190 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Speed Dialing: Private Library

You may program your telephone with your own private Speed Dial directory, which can be used to speed dial long numbers . Each entry is called a Private Library Number. The Private Library can be programmed with an external or internal dial number. You can also use a Private Library to dial external or network numbers for features that allow only internal destinations such as Call Forward, Divert and Hunt features. When entering external dial numbers, make sure to include the external access code into the Private Library number as well.

The speed dial numbers are programmed per station and are unique to each station. Therefore, dialing the same private library number at one station will most likely include a different destination than dialing the same Private Library number at another station. Use the table below to write down your Coral Speed Dial numbers.

Private Library - Speed Dial Numbers

Private Library Contents (Destination) Private Library

Number

7000

7001

7002

7003

7004

7005

7006

7007

7008

7009

Station Telephony Features

Speed Dialing: Private Library

191 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Programming a new Private Library:

Private Libraries are saved via the Coral system with your station number but not in your phone’s memory.

Private Library is accessible from the Setup menu. Press

[fSet] [Lib]

to access the Private Library options.

Page 1

COS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[fSet]

Trc Room

Page 2

Feature Setup

→ Pass

Prog Pref

[Lib]

Page 3

PRIVAT LIBRARIES

Lib# Prev Next Exit

[Lib#]

Library is used to select a new Private Library number.

[Prev]

[Next]

Previous scrolls to the previous Private Library.

Next scrolls to the next Private Library.

To program or change a Private Library Speed Dial number

1. Press

[fSet] [Lib]

.

2. Choose

[Lib#]

and dial the Library number to be programmed or scroll through the list of private library numbers using

[Next] and

[Prev]

.

Station Telephony Features

Speed Dialing: Private Library

192 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

3. The Library number (e.g.: PRIVAT LIB 7000) appears on the top line of the display. The Library contents appear on the second line of the display.

NOTE! Use the table on

page 191

to write down your Coral Private Speed Dial numbers (default Private

Library numbers are 7000 to 7009, these may differ in your system, see your system administrator for your system’s Private Library numbers).

4. Dial the digits you would normally dial to place the call (include outside line access code). Insert required dial parameters in between the dialing digits when needed. These parameters appear over pages on your phone display. Press the relevant soft key when needed. The list of dial parameters is given below:

NOTES! Possible outside line access codes are: trunk number, trunk group number, dial service, routing access or another public/private library number.

[Ext#]

[Next]

[Prev]

[Canc]

[Dly] [x sec]

[Code] [End]

The number of digits that can be programmed, including Codes and Pause (time delay), is limited by the system (defined system-wide). Should you try entering a longer digit string than allowed, the system will give the error message LENGTH EXCEEDED, and programming will stop.

External telephone number. Choose this to program or change an external number in the required Library number. Dial the required external number. Press

SPKR

to save your entry, or

[Next]

or

[Prev]

to save this number and select a new library number.

Next is used to view the next Library number.

Previous is used to view the previous Library number.

Cancel is used to delete the Library contents.

After entering the outside access code, when entering digits into the Library number, you may also enter any one of these special dial codes in between the digits to enhance dialing:

Time Delay (seconds) where x=1 to 9: Introduces a delay of x seconds before the following digits are dialed.

Final Digit (stop dial). Indicates to the system to stop dialing the outside number (display shows ‘.’).

Station Telephony Features

Speed Dialing: Private Library

193 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Code] [Free]

[Code] [Puls]

[Code] [Tone]

[Code] [xDsp]

[Code] [vDsp]

[Code] [WtDT]

[Code] [-Dsp]

[Code] [Flsh]

[Code] [*Out]

[Code] [#Out]

Free Dial. Offers the user a free time interval in which he is able to dial any number of digits.

Dial Pulse. Notifies the system that all following digits will be Dial Pulse digits.

Dial Tone. Notifies the system that all following digits will be Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) digits.

Display Off. Inhibits the display of the Library contents on the phone. Also used for Call Accounting System

(digits displayed as ‘_’).

Display On. Enables the display of the Library contents on the phone. Also used for Call Accounting

System.

Wait for Dial Tone. Asks the system to wait for Dial Tone before dialing the digits.

Display Dash (–). Displays a dash (–) within the dialing number on the phone.

Flash Trunk. Sends a Calibrated Opening (Flash) over a trunk line (display shows hf).

Dial Asterisk (*). Dials an asterisk (*) as part of the dialing number.

Dial Pound (#). Dials a pound sign (#) as part of the dialing number.

Deleting a single Private Library Number from memory:

1. Press

[fSet] [Lib]

.

2. Choose

[Lib#]

and dial the Library number to be removed or scroll through the list of private library numbers using

[Next]

and

[Prev]

.

3. The Library number (e.g.: PRIVAT LIB 7000) appears on the top line of the display. The Library contents appear on the second line of the display.

4. Choose [Canc].

5. Press

SPKR

to exit.

Station Telephony Features

Speed Dialing: Private Library

194 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Speed Dialing: Using Private and Public Libraries

Speed dialing using a Private Library or system Public Library number is basically the same, therefore the process is described generally for both dialing systems. If Public Speed Dialing is available on your system, consult your company directory for library numbers.

To dial a Public or Private Speed dial number:

1. Lift handset.

2. Dial speed call library number (Private or Public).

Notes: 1) In some cases the Speed Dialing number must be followed by a Forced Account code. When Forced Account code is required the distinctive dial tone is heard after dialing the speed call library number.

2) Certain speed dialing numbers require that you dial the relevant outside line access code. When required, the dial tone is heard after dialing the Speed call library number.

Station Telephony Features

Speed Dialing: Using Private and Public Libraries

195 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) for Other Common Carriers (OCC)

Enables you to send DTMF tones using the dial pad over non-DTMF trunks and stations during any call (phone to trunk, phone to phone, 3-Way Conference, Meet-Me Conference, etc.). In this way you can control any device (such as Voice Mail,

IVR, start/stop recording a call, etc.) requiring DTMF response.

The party information is displayed on the top line. The digits are displayed on the second line as they are dialed and the corresponding DTMF tones are heard by all parties to the call.

NOTE!

phones

defined with Auto Transfer must use this feature even when sending DTMF tones to

DTMF trunks and stations.

ANSWER

DIAL 123456...

party info

↑→

[OCC]

The OCC feature is an on/off toggle switch. Press

[OCC]

once to activate DTMF mode; press again to return to normal mode.

Activating using soft keys:

1. Press

[OCC]

.

2. Dial the required digits.

Activating using preprogrammed key:

1. Press the preprogrammed

OCC

key.

2. Dial the required digits.

NOTE! To learn how to program a key, see

page 167 . To program an OCC key, use feature code #127.

Station Telephony Features 196

Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) for Other Common Carriers (OCC)

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Transfer (Xfer)

You can transfer both internal and external calls to other users within your system or outside it. Transfer routes a call you received to an idle station. It can also link a call you held to other ports. When Auto transfer is defined at a station, dialing a number will automatically transfer that number, thus initial use of

[Xfer]

or

XFER

is not necessary, although subsequent actions do require pressing

[Xfer]

(as defined in this manual). This feature is typically utilized by attendants. Remaining procedures are the same as for a regular transfer. A call can be screened or unscreened:

Screened Transfer (Consultation Transfer):

You may announce the call before transferring.

Unscreened Transfer (Direct transfer, Blind transfer, Unsupervised transfer or Cold transfer):

You may transfer the call without a prior announcement or without notifying the recipient. When the destination is busy, hanging up will cause the system to camp on (external call only) to the busy station.

Transferring an established call:

1. During a call, press

[Xfer]

or

XFER

.

2. Dial the third party destination number.

3. Choose one of the following options:

• Wait for an answer to announce the call and disconnect (screened transfer).

You can now alternate between the two parties and speak privately with one while the other is put on hold by choosing the relevant flashing Exclude Source/Destination soft keys.

• If

[Src]

is flashing, choose

[Src]

to speak privately with the first party.

• If

[Dest]

is flashing, choose

[Dest]

to speak privately with the second party.

• If neither

[Src]

nor

[Dest]

are flashing, choose either

[Src]

or

[Dest]

and then converse 3-way.

• If you are in 3-way and you wish to converse privately again with any party; choose either the

[Src]

or

[Dest]

and the other party will again be put on hold.

• Press

[Xfer]

to release the destination (second) party and return to 2-way conversation with the source.

• Choose

[fRls]

to release all parties.

• Choose

[3Way]

or press the CONF key to establish a 3-way call.

Station Telephony Features

Transfer (Xfer)

197 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

OR

• Disconnect to automatically transfer the call (unscreened transfer).

If the 3rd party is busy or does not answer, the call will return to you with the relevant BUSY or NO

ANSWER

message.

NANS station unanswered # original #

NO ANSWER unanswered #

DND Mute FwdA Num

Station does not answer

SBSY busy station # original #

BUSY busy #

DND Mute FwdA Num

Station is busy

Answer the return call, then either:

• Ask the calling party if they wish to transfer to another party.

• Hang up.

• Press

[Camp]

to automatically camp on to the station from which the call was transferred.

Transferring a held call:

Use transfer of a held call to connect an incoming call to the held party, such as when you have to locate someone for a caller.

1. Press

[Xfer]

or

XFER

. While the party is being held, dial a destination number.

2. Press the flashing DSS key associated with the held call.

3. Press

SPKR

or hang up to transfer the call.

Station Telephony Features

Transfer (Xfer)

198 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Transfer: Split Call

Split call allows you to alternate between two other parties, by pressing soft keys defined as Exclude Source and Exclude

Destination. The feature also allows 3-way conversation by merely pressing one of the keys,

[Src]

or

[Dest]

, when the bullet next to that key is steadily lit. This feature can be activated in any sequence, any number of times. When you speak privately, with either the Source or Destination, the other party is automatically put on hold.

Source: the first party with whom a connection was made.

Destination: the second party with whom a connection was made.

The following table allows identifying the progress of split calls when your phone is not equipped with a message display.

Source

On

Flashing

On

Keys

Dest

Flashing

On

On

Status

Speaking privately with source (first party)

Speaking privately with destination (second party)

3-way conversation

Activating Split Call on conversation:

1. Press

[Xfer]

.

2. Dial the destination number and wait for an answer.

3. You can now alternate between the two parties and speak privately with one while the other is put on hold by pressing the relevant flashing key.

4. Press the flashing

[Src]

to speak privately with the first party; or

Press the flashing

[Dest]

to speak privately with the second party; or

You can press

[3Way]

or the key with a steadily lit bullet and then converse 3-way.

Station Telephony Features

Transfer (Xfer)

199 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

5. If you wish to converse privately again with any party:

Press either the

[Src]

or

[Dest]

key and the other party will again be put on hold.

6. If you wish to release the destination (second) party and return to 2-way conversation with the source, press

[Xfer]

.

7. If you wish to release all parties press

[fRls]

.

Station Telephony Features

Transfer (Xfer)

200 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Transfer: Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call

Your telephone can be set up to use one or all (if your Transfer COS is defined as ALL) of the following three-party transfer functions, as defined by your Transfer COS definition (consult your system administrator for details).

Each action is performed by first pressing

[Xfer]

(transfer) or

XFER

; however, for stations where Auto Transfer is defined (in the Class of Service), transfer will take place as soon as the required number is dialled. This will take effect only the first time that the transfer takes place. Subsequent actions do require pressing

[Xfer]

as defined in this manual.

Function Use to:

Broker Call

This feature allows you to put a call on hold and then converse privately with a third party, while switching between the two calls. The party not in conversation is automatically put on hold and cannot hear any other conversation. See

Transfer: Broker on page 202

.

Consultation Call

This feature allows you to consult with a third party. While consulting, the original caller will be put on hold. After consultation is complete the two original parties will be reconnected and the consulted party

is then released. See

Transfer: Consultation on page 203

.

3-Way Conference

Call

This feature allows you to bring a third party into an ongoing conversation. All three parties can converse in a three party conference. See

Transfer: 3-Way Conference on page 203

.

Combination of

Consultation/

Broker/

3-Way Conference

This feature allows you to change a conversation from broker to consultation to 3-way conference by pressing [Xfer] or XFER while in conversation. The first transfer allows you to converse privately with a third party. The second transfer allows you to speak privately with the original party, while the third party is put on hold. The third transfer places you in a 3-way conversation with all parties.

Station Telephony Features

Transfer: Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call

201 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Transfer: Broker

During a call, use this feature to connect to a third party while placing the original (source) party on hold. You may continue to switch between the two calls (parties). The party not in conversation is automatically put on hold.

1. During the call, press

[Xfer]

or

XFER

.

2. Dial the third party dial number.

3. Wait for an answer.

The original party is placed on hold. You may now speak freely with the third party.

4. The following options are now available:

•Press

[Brkr]

or

[Src]

or

[Dest]

to alternate between the calls any number of times.

[Src]

and

[Dest]

flash depending on which party you are connected to.

•Press a non-flashing

[Src]

or

[Dest]

soft key for a 3-way call.

•Press

[fRls]

in order to release all parties and press

SPKR

.

•Press

SPKR

or hang up in order to allow conversation between the two parties.

NOTE! If you do not succeed in establishing the Brokered call, your Transfer COS definition may not be set to use the Broker Call function. Consult your system administrator for details.

Station Telephony Features

Transfer: Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call

202 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Transfer: Consultation

This feature allows you to consult with a third party while the original caller (or called party) is automatically placed on hold.

After the consultation is complete, the two original parties are reconnected and the consulted party is released.

1. During the call, press

[Xfer]

or

XFER

.

2. Dial the third party dial number.

3. When your call is answered, the original party is placed on hold so that you may converse privately with the second party.

4. After the consultation is concluded, press

[Cslt]

or

[Xfer]

to return to the original call and disconnect from the consulted party.

NOTE! If you do not succeed in establishing the Consultation call, your Transfer COS definition may not be set to use the Consultation Call function. Consult your system administrator for details.

Transfer: 3-Way Conference

During a call you can use this feature to add another party to the call, creating a 3-way Conference call.

1. During the call, press

[Xfer]

or

XFER

.

2. Dial the third party dial number.

3. Wait for the third party to answer.

4. Press

[3Way]

or CONF to connect all three parties. If your COS definition is defined as ALL, then you must press

[3Way] or CONF key again to establish the 3-way call;

or

Press

[fRls]

to release the third party and to return to the original call (same as consultation call).

Station Telephony Features

Transfer: Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call

203 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Other options after 3-way call is established:

• Press

[Xfer]

or XFER again to release the third party, and continue conversing with the original party.

• Press the lit

[Src]

to converse privately with the first (Source) party that you connected to. The third (Destination) party is put on hold while you converse and

[Dest]

flashes.

• Press the lit

[Dest]

to converse privately with the second (Destination) party that you connected to. The second

(Source) party is put on hold while you converse and

[Src]

flashes.

• Press the flashing

[Dest]

or

[Src]

soft key to switch between the Source and Destination parties.

• Press

[3Way]

or press the CONF key to reconnect all three parties again.

• Press

[fRls]

to end the call (3-Way or 2-Way).

NOTE! If you do not succeed in establishing a 3-way call, your Transfer COS definition may not be set to use the 3-Way Call function. Consult your system administrator for details.

Station Telephony Features

Transfer: Broker/Consultation/3-Way Conference Call

204 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Wakeup

Use this feature to program your phone to ring at designated times. If you do not answer the call, the phone will ring three more times at one-minute intervals. If you do not answer by the third call, the wakeup call is routed to the attendant and a wakeup report is printed.

Press

[Wake]

to access the Wakeup options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ ActC

CID

[Wake] cIns

Page 2

WAKEUP 10:00am

New Next canc

Entering Wakeup request:

1. Press

[Wake]

.

2. Enter the time you wish to be called at the ENTER TIME prompt. Note that four digits are required for a 12-hr clock:

(i.e. 0805 for 8:05).

3. Choose

[AM]

or

[PM]

.

NOTE! If you hear a reorder tone, Wakeup is denied at your station (as defined by Class of Service). In order to make use of this feature, request that the attendant activate Wakeup at your station.

•To add another Wakeup time, choose

[New]

and continue with step

2

above.

•To scroll through the Wakeup list, press

[Next]

.

•To cancel the selected Wakeup time (displayed on the top line), choose [Canc].

Station Telephony Features

Wakeup

205 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

When Wakeup call rings:

When the phone rings, the WAKE message appears on the top line indicating that this is a Wakeup call. Press

SPKR

to answer the call; the ANSWER WAKE message appears on the top line. Choose one of the following:

1. Press

[Snz]

to have the system recall you later; or

2. Press

SPKR

to cancel the reminder.

Station Telephony Features

Wakeup

206 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Whisper Paging

This feature allows an authorized user to break into an ongoing call, without interfering with the call itself, by whispering to one of the conversing parties. A Whisper Tone, in and out, is heard by the side whispered to.

The second party engaged in the original call hears neither tone, nor the whisper, and the whisperer cannot hear the second conversing party. The party whispered to continues to hear the second party, and also hears the whisperer in lowered volume.

The party whispered to can reject the whisper page.

This feature can also be activated while in Silent Monitor and then the whisperer can be heard as well as hear the two parties conversing.

Press

[WPg]

to Whisper Page a station.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ Park

VPg

[WPg]

SM

Page 2

WHSPR PAGE

*Enter Destination*

Sending a Whisper Page:

1. Press

[WPg]

.

2. Dial a station number.

3. Listen for the whisper tone.

4. Deliver the message and disconnect.

Station Telephony Features

Whisper Paging

207 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

NOTES!

• Whisper Page may not be sent to FlexAir handsets (T-402, T-404, T-408, T-304) and IP stations (T207M, T208M,

T207M/NP, T208M/BL, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S).

• This feature can be activated while you are silent monitoring the whispered party (see

Silent Monitoring on page 188)

. Then you can be heard by the whispered party, as well as hear the two conversing parties.

• When you hear the reorder tone and the DND WHISPER message appears, the station is protected from receiving whisper paging calls.

• If you hear the reorder tone and the ON-HOOK BY message appears, the receiving party has rejected your whisper page.

Station Telephony Features

Whisper Paging

208 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Attendant Features

Available Functions

The following pages list the Attendant features that are available on your phone. Attendant features are available only when the station is defined as having Attendant station privileges. Not every Attendant feature listed may have been installed in your system, or at your station/extension. Attendant features are dependent on the assigned Class of Service (COS) levels.

Check with your system administrator for a list of the specific features installed.

Most attendant features are activated upon other stations. The available features are displayed below. These features are accessed from idle.

→ aWk

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number aTrc aRS aFwd

Attendant Features

Available Functions

209 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Available Functions

Function

Option

[Dest]

[St#]

[SRm#]

[sGp#]

[sRmG]

[Tk#]

[tGp#]

[f-Up]

[f-Dn]

[Next]

[Prev]

[Canc]

Mnemonic Function Explanation

Destination

Previous

Scrolling

Cancel

Any station, trunk, ACD/UCD Hunt Group, Boss Group and Public Library port defined in the system.

Port dial number defined in the Coral system for a telephone line.

Station #

Station/Room #

Station/Group #

Station/Room/

Station Group

Trunk Dial #

A number of stations linked together (members) for a common function such as ACD/

UCD group or Boss Group. A station can be defined as a member of many ACD/UCD groups and/or Boss Groups.

Dial Number assigned to a trunk.

Trunk/Group Number A number of trunks linked together (members) for a common outgoing function.

Fast Up Scroll Used to fast scroll forward to the next assigned feature.

Fast Down Scroll

Next

Used to fast scroll backward to the previous assigned feature.

Used to scroll forward port by port through available ports. While scrolling, the port name/number appears on the top line.

Used to scroll backward port by port through available ports. While scrolling, the port name/number appears on the top line.

Once you reach the first port on the list, this option changes to another option.

The scroll icon used in this document indicates features for which scroll lists are available, namely the [Next], [Prev], [p-Up], [p-Dn], [f-Up] and [f-Dn] soft keys .

Used to cancel or to deassign a selected feature.

Attendant Features

Available Functions

210 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Function

Option

[Set]

[Exit]

Mnemonic

Activate

Exit/Terminate

Function Explanation

Used to activate or to assign a selected feature.

Same as pressing SPKR. Used to determine the end of the feature programming or to escape from the current operation.

Attendant Features

Available Functions

211 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Call Forward

The attendant may program stations, boss groups and ACD/UCD groups so that incoming calls ring at various destinations, depending on the state of the terminal (all, busy, no answer, timed).

These features can also be operated directly from a user station when defined by the COS, without attendant involvement.

Calls incoming from an external source only can be forwarded using

[eAll]

,

[eBsy]

,

[eNA]

, and

[eTim]

. Additionally, calls from

Internal and External sources can be forwarded to different destinations, as described in

Internal/External Call Forwarding on page 76

.

Possible destinations are operator, station/group, external number via public and private speed call library, DVMS pre-

recorded message, UNA/central bell, group call, or network number (and the station itself for external calls).

Attendant Call Forwarding options are accessed by pressing

[aFwd]

from idle state.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[aFwd]

Chrg sSet tSet

[All]

or

[eAll]

Page 2

Attend: Call Forward e=Exter BNA=BusyNoAns

↓→ All eAll Busy eBsy

Forward All. The attendant may program stations, boss groups and ACD/UCD groups so that incoming calls ring at another destination. The destination can call back or return calls to the source, and the user can still place outgoing calls from their telephone. The Distinctive Dial Tone sounds upon lifting the handset at the user’s station.

Attendant Features

Call Forward

212 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Busy]

or

[eBsy]

Forward Busy. The attendant may program stations and boss groups so that incoming calls ring at another destination when the originally called station or group is busy.

[NA]

or

[eNA]

Forward No Answer. The attendant may program stations and boss groups so that incoming calls ring at another destination when the originally called station or group does not answer within a system-defined number of rings.

[Time]

or

[eTim]

Forward Timed. The attendant may program stations, boss groups and ACD/UCD Groups so that incoming calls ring at another destination during specified system-defined time periods. See table

on page 74

.

Operating Attendant Call Forward:

1. Press

[aFwd]

.

2. Choose the required forwarding option (

[All]

,

[eAll]

,

[

Busy

]

,

[eBsy]

,

[NA]

,

[eNA]

,

[

Time

]

,

[eTim]

).

3. Choose

[sGp#]

and dial the originating station/group number, or scroll between stations/groups using .

4. To set Call Forward, choose

[Dest]

and dial the call forward destination number, OR

To cancel Call Forward, choose [Canc].

5. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit and save.

Attendant Features

Call Forward

213 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Canned Messages

The Canned Messages feature is used to set a canned message for other stations. The attendant may set individual stations with any one of 16 canned messages so that internal callers to the station see the message displayed on the second line of their display panel until the call is answered.

Canned Messages can also be set directly from a user station, without attendant involvement (see

page 87

).

Canned message texts are pre-programmed by your system adminitrator. They can be used to indicate the station’s status (or any other pertinent information) to the calling party. Contact your system administrator for the list of canned message texts

used in your organization. Use the

Table on page 216

to list the canned messages available.

NOTE! Check with your system administrator whether your Coral system supports the Canned Messages or Room Status feature. If your Coral system supports the Room Status feature (see

page 218 ),

the Canned Message feature is unavailable.

Press

[aRS]

to access the Canned Messages options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ Room

[aRS] bFwd aFwd

[RSx]

Page 2

Attendant: Room Status

↓→ RS0

RS1 RS2

Canned Message x (where x= 0 to 15, see

Table on page 216

).

RS3

Attendant Features

Canned Messages

214 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Operating Canned Messages:

1. Press the required Canned Message soft key. The canned message appears on the top line.

2. Press

[SRm#]

and enter the station/room number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose [Set] to activate, OR

Choose [Canc] to deactivate or reset.

The status definition

ASSIGN/DEASSIGN

appears on the top line.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit and save.

NOTE! The first canned message that you activated is the one that will appear on the internal caller’s display panel. Therefore, to set a new canned message ensure that you cancel all previously set canned messages.

Attendant Features

Canned Messages

215 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Canned Message

Number

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

[RS12]

[RS13]

[RS14]

[RS15]

[RS8]

[RS9]

[RS10]

[RS11]

[RS4]

[RS5]

[RS6]

[RS7]

[RS0]

[RS1]

[RS2]

[RS3]

Canned Message - Text and Attendant Access Codes

Soft Key Access Code

(Dial Pad#)

7018

7019

7020

7021

7022

7023

7024

7025

7010

7011

7012

7013

7014

7015

7016

7017

Canned Message Text

Attendant Features

Canned Messages

216 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Malicious Call Trace

The Attendant may initiate this feature that records the next x (a system-defined variable) calls to any station or room. A list of the calls can also be sent to a printer or terminal. Press

[aTrc]

to access the Attendant Malicious Call Trace options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[aTrc]

Room aRS bFwd

Page 2

Attendant: Call Trace

On/Off Prnt

[V/X]

Malicious Call Trace On/Off toggles the Malicious Call Trace on or off.

1. Press

[V/X]

.

NOTE! If the system resources are insufficient for the feature to be available, the message

NO TRACE RECORD appears.

2. Choose

[SRm#]

and dial a station/room number, or scroll through the list using .

3. To start call trace, choose

[Set]

. To stop call trace, choose [Canc].

[Prnt]

Malicious Call Trace Print sends a list of the calls to a terminal or printer. Malicious Call Trace must previously be activated (see On/Off above), or the message CALL TRACE OFF will appear and the action will not be completed.

1. Press

[Prnt]

.

2. Choose

[SRm#]

and dial a station/room number, or scroll through the list using

[Next]

and

[Prev]

only.

3. Choose

[Set]

to print. The message CALL TRACE PRINT appears.

Attendant Features

Malicious Call Trace

217 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Room Status

Used to turn the Room Status definition of a station on or off. There are 16 different Room Status definitions for each station.

This feature is applicable for Hotel/Motel use. Contact your system administrator for their various definitions. Use the

Table on page 219

to write in the various room statuses.

NOTE! Check with your system administrator whether your Coral system supports the Room Status or

Canned Messages feature. If your Coral system supports the Canned Messages feature (see

page 214 ), the Room Status feature is unavailable.

Press

[aRS]

to access the Room Status options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ Room

[aRS] bFwd aFwd

Page 2

Attendant: Room Status

↓→ RS0

RS1 RS2 RS3

[RSx]

Room Status x (where x= 0 to 15, see

Table on page 219

).

1. Press the required Room Status soft key. The status definition appears on the top line.

2. Press

[SRm#]

and enter the station/room number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose [Set] to activate, OR

Choose [Canc] to deactivate or reset.

The status definition

ASSIGN/DEASSIGN

appears on the top line.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit and save.

Attendant Features

Room Status

218 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Attendant Features

Room Status

Room Status

Number

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

7

8

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

[RS11]

[RS12]

[RS13]

[RS14]

[RS15]

[RS7]

[RS8]

[RS9]

[RS10]

[RS0]

[RS1]

[RS2]

[RS3]

[RS4]

[RS5]

[RS6]

Room Status - Names and Attendant Access Codes

Soft Key Name Access Code

(Dial Pad#)

7017

7018

7019

7020

7021

7022

7023

7024

7025

7010

7011

7012

7013

7014

7015

7016

219 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

WakeUp

The attendant may program the system to call any room/station at a designated time.

If the user does not answer the initial wakeup call, recall will be attempted three times before the feature cancels (when defined system-wide).

If none of the recall attempts are answered, or the line is busy, or the handset is not on the cradle, then the attendant will receive a call with the NOT WOKEN message on the top line indicating that the wakeup call failed.

station or room # NOT WOKEN

Should such a failure occur, it is recommended that the attendant provide an alternate means for waking the guest.

Printouts are possible for: new/cancel, fail, success. The printout type is also defined system-wide.

Press

[aWk]

to access the Attendant WakeUp options.

[Req]

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ ActC

CID Wake

[aWk]

Page 2

Attendant: WakeUp

Req Prnt

WakeUp Request is used to program a station to ring at a specified time.

Attendant Features

WakeUp

220 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Entering a new Wakeup Request:

1. Press

[Req]

.

2. Choose

[SRm#]

and dial the station/room number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose

[Set]

to enter a new time for the station/room. The ENTER TIME message appears on the top line.

4. Dial in the wakeup time.

NOTE! Four digits are required for a 12-hr clock: (i.e. 0805 for 8:05).

5. Choose

[AM]

or

[PM]

.

6. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

Canceling Wakeup Request:

1. Press

[Req]

.

2. Choose

[SRm#]

and dial a station/room number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose [Canc] to delete the time.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

[Prnt]

WakeUp Report is used to print the wakeup requests that were not answered. The report may be sorted by the requested wakeup time, or by the station number, as defined system-wide.

1. Press

[Prnt]

.

2. The WAKEUP REPORT message appears on the top line of the display.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone. The printer automatically prints the report.

Attendant Features

WakeUp

221 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Call Charge

]

The Call Charge feature is used to determine call charges accumulated per station.

Press

[Chrg]

to access the Call Charge options.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ aFwd

[Chrg] sSet tSet

Page 2

Attendant: Call Charge

Prnt RST

[Prnt]

Call Charge Report. The Attendant may request the Call Charge printout at any time for a single station/ room or for all stations/rooms without resetting the Charge Table content. This feature is useful for informing a hotel guest of current telephone charges.

Printing for a single station/room:

1. Press

[Prnt]

.

2. Choose

[SRm#]

and dial a station/room number, or scroll through the list using

[Next]

and

[Prev]

.

3. Choose

[Set]

to print. The PRINTED message appears on the top line of the display.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

Printing for all stations/rooms:

1. Press

[Prnt]

.

2. Choose

[Set]

to print.

Attendant Features

Call Charge

222 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[RST]

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Call Charge Print and Reset is used to reset the charge table back to zero and print the charges accumulated per station. The attendant may request print and reset for only one station/room or for all stations/rooms. This feature is useful for giving a hotel guest the telephone charges at checkout time.

Printing and resetting the charge table:

For a single station/room:

1. Press

[RST]

(print with reset).

2. Choose

[SRm#]

and dial a station/room number, or scroll through the list using

[Next]

and

[Prev]

.

3. Choose

[Set]

to reset and print. The PRINTED WITH RESET message appears on the top and middle lines of the display.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

For all stations/rooms:

1. Press

[RST]

(print with reset).

2. Scroll to the beginning of the list using

[Prev]

.

3. Choose

[Set]

to reset and print.

4. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Attendant Features

Call Charge

223 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Station Setup Features

The Station Setup Features menu allows an attendant to define stations for specific feature activation. Some of these features operate permanently, or until redefined. Other features operate on a one-time basis; after the feature is activated, it is then cancelled and must be redefined or reactivated in order to operate again.

Press

[sSet]

to access the Station Setup Features.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

→ aFwd

Chrg

[sSet] tSet

Page 2

Station Feat Setup

↓→ ChkO

DND HotD HotI

‰

[ChkO]

[DND]

[HotD]

Check In/Check Out enables certain activities to be performed automatically (primarily used for rooms/ stations). These are: Room Block/Unblock, Charge Print, Canceling Existing Messages and Terminating

DND. Additionally, if defined system-wide, Wakeup and Call Forward are cancelled and Charge is reset. In some systems (defined system-wide) this feature can be activated only on idle stations. If an attempt is made to activate the feature on a busy station, the BUSY message is displayed.

Do Not Disturb (DND) is used to activate Do Not Disturb for a station or boss group. A caller to this station will hear a reorder tone, and only a station with DND override is able to call that station.

Hot Station Delay is used to program a telephone to ring another station, automatically connect to a paging device, or automatically dial out when the handset is taken off-hook, or

SPKR

is pressed, and no digits are

dialed within the programmed first digit time-out. Possible destinations are operator, station, hunt group,

Attendant Features

Station Setup Features

224 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

‰

[HotI]

[OrgO]

[noTK]

[Blck]

[TrmO]

boss group, keyset voice page, zone group page, page public address, UNA/central bell, outside trunk call,

public and private speed dial, pre-recorded DVMS message, group call, and network number.

NOTE! Hot Station Delay is not applicable for SIP telephones, such as: T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, and

T208S/BL.

Hot Station Immediate is used to program a telephone to immediately ring another station, automatically connect to a paging device, or automatically dial out immediately when the handset is taken off-hook, or

SPKR

is pressed (or upon dialing from T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, and T208S/BL telephones). Possible destinations are operator, station, hunt group, boss group, keyset voice page, zone group page, page public

address, UNA/central bell, outside trunk call, public and private speed dial, pre-recorded DVMS message,

group call, and network number.

Originating Only is used to prohibit incoming calls from arriving at a station. In this case the user can only make outgoing calls, but is unable to receive calls. A caller to this station will hear the reorder tone.

Outgoing Call Restriction is used to prevent a station from making outgoing trunk calls.

Station Blocking is used to temporarily prevent a station from both making and receiving calls. A caller to this station will hear the reorder tone.

Terminating Only is used to prohibit a station from originating any telephone calls (internal or external).

When defined as Terminating Only, the user can receive calls, but is unable to make calls.

Attendant Features

Station Setup Features

225 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Operating features marked with

(Above):

1. Choose the required feature option (

[ChkO]

,

[DND]

,

[OrgO]

,

[noTK]

,

[Blck]

, or

[TrmO]

).

2. Press

[SRm#]

and dial a station/room number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose

[Set]

to activate (ASSIGN message appears), OR

Choose [Canc] to deactivate (DEASSIGN message appears).

NOTE! For [ChkO], [Set] activates Check Out and

[Canc]

activates Check In.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

Operating features marked with ‰ (Above):

1. Choose the required feature option (

[HotD]

or

[HotI]

).

2. Press

[SRm#]

and dial the originating station number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose

[Dest]

and dial the destination number, OR

Choose [Canc] to cancel feature.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

Attendant Features

Station Setup Features

226 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

System Features

The System Controls menu allows the attendant to program certain features for system-wide operations.

Press

[Sys]

to access the System Setup Features.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

↑→ Chrg sSet tSet

[Sys]

Page 2

System Features Setup

↓→ Alrm

ATT2 XD/N D/N1

[Alrm]

Alarm is used to identify and examine system alarms.

See the PI & Database Reference Manual for a detailed list of the alarm codes and their definitions.

1. Press

[Alrm]

.

2. Choose

[Next]

(next alarm) to scroll through the alarm list. The alarm number and its code are listed on the system lines.

3. Make a list of each alarm number to report to the technician.

4. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to exit.

Attendant Features

System Features

227 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Alarm message – LED status:

When an

ALARM

DSS key is programmed (default dial number: #1997), the LED status indicates the following conditions:

Off:

Flashing:

Steady On:

No alarms

Alarm condition has occurred

Alarm condition remains but has been examined by the attendant

Table of Alarm Types

Type of

Fault

60

Description

Data Terminal Ready (DTR) not sent.

61 other

Action

SMDR backup buffer has reached 75% of its capacity. Only 25% of the number of records defined system-wide can now be accommodated in the space remaining.

SMDR printer is malfunctioning and requires service.

The printer requires immediate service or the SMDR records will be lost.

Call service technician.

Attendant Features

System Features

228 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[ATT2]

[XD/N]

[D/N1]

[D/N2]

Alternate Attendant Destination. This feature enables you to program an alternate attendant destination or extension if the console is left unattended. After a time-out period, incoming calls to an unattended console will be re-routed to the selected destination and the attendant console will go into Unattended mode

(see

Do Not Disturb (DND) on page 101)

. Any action that is performed at the original console will force it

back to Attended mode and the alternate destination back to normal operation.

Possible destinations are station, hunt group, boss group, UNA/ central bell, pre-recorded DVMS message,

public/private speed call, and group call.

Program an alternate destination in the following way:

1. Press

[ATT2]

.

2. Dial the destination number where calls are to be forwarded, OR

Choose

[Dest]

to change the destination, OR

Choose [Canc] to cancel the alternate destination.

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Day/Night Transfer toggle feature. Press

[XD/N]

to switch from automatic to manual transfer between the various Day/Night service modes and back again. When set to Auto Transfer, a bullet is displayed next to

[XD/N]

.

When set to Automatic, the system will transfer service modes without attendant supervision.

When set to Manual, the attendant must decide when to change modes using

[D/N1]

and

[D/N2]

(see below).

Day/Night 1 toggles between Day (normal mode) and Night 1 service modes. When set to Night 1, a bullet is displayed next to

[D/N1]

.

Day/Night 2 toggles between Day (normal mode) and Night 2 service modes. When set to Night 2, a bullet is displayed next to

[D/N2]

.

Use the table below to enter the relevant information concerning Day/Night Transfer. Contact your system administrator for Day/Night Transfer times and destinations.

Attendant Features

System Features

229 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Day/Night Transfer Information

[Lib]

Service

Mode

DAY

NIGHT 1

NIGHT 1

Start Time

( for automatic transfer)

Incomplete Calls

Destination

Intercept Calls

Destination

COS

Primary/Secondary

Public Library is used to program or update the Public Speed Call telephone library.

To update/add/cancel a Public Speed Dial number:

1. Press

[Lib]

.

2. Choose

[Lib#]

and dial the library number, or scroll through the list of library numbers using .

The Library number/name (e.g. PUBLIC LIB 6000) appears on the top line of the display. The Library contents appear on the second line of the display.

3. Choose

[Ext#]

and enter the digits you normally dial to place the external call, including the outside line access code. Possible outside line access codes: trunk number, trunk group number, dial service, routing

access or another public/personal library number and, for special purposes, station/group numbers.

Special dial codes can be added to the outside dial number (see table

below

).

NOTE! A new number programmed into an existing library number will erase the old number, but will save the old library name.

4. Alternatively, choose [Canc] to delete the Library contents.

CAUTION!

When a library number is deleted, its name is also deleted. Names can only be entered by an authorized technician or system administrator.

Attendant Features

System Features

230 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

5. Press

SPKR

or

[Exit]

to terminate.

The following table defines the special codes that may be used as part of the outside number.

Codes

#2

#3

#4

#5

*x

#0

#1

#6

#8

#9

**

##

Description

Delay dialing by X seconds (x = 1 to 9)

Stop dial (end of outside or network number)

Outpulsing wait period during which user is able to dial any number of digits

All digits following will be Dial Pulse

All digits following will be Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF)

Inhibits display (for Call Accounting System and key set display)

Enables display (for Call Accounting System and key set display)

Wait for second dial tone

Display ‘_’ (for Call Accounting System and key set display)

Calibrated Opening on trunk (FlashTk)

Dial * out

Dial # out

NOTE! The number of digits that can be programmed, including dial codes, is limited by the Coral

(defined system-wide). If you try entering a longer digit string than allowed the system will give the error message LENGTH EXCEEDED, and programming will stop.

Attendant Features

System Features

231 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Time]

Time is used to change the system time and date to reflect the time and date where the Coral system is installed.

NOTE! To set an offset time, see

Time Zone on page 248 .

Setting the time:

1. Press

[Time]

.

2. Dial the time, four digits (12 hour clock) use leading zeros, e.g. 0805 for 5 minutes after 8.

3. Choose

[AM]

or

[PM]

.

4. Choose

[Set]

.

5. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Setting the date:

1. Press

[Time]

.

2. Choose

[Date]

.

3. Dial the date, six-digit format: mm:dd:yy or dd:mm:yy (depending on your system setup). Use leading zeros.

For Example: May 26, 2006 should be entered as 052606 in North America, 260506 in Europe.

4. Choose

[Set]

.

5. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Attendant Features

System Features

232 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Trunk Setup Features

Trunk Controls allow the attendant to define the operation of system trunks for special use, such as for incoming or outgoing calls only, or for designation of a trunk as reserved for a particular group or specific station.

Press

[tSet]

to access the Trunk Setup Features.

Page 1

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

↑→ Chrg sSet

[tSet]

Sys

Page 2

System Features Setup

AGrd Blck BOut DIL

[AGrd]

Auto Guard is used to view which of the trunks have been automatically blocked from use for outgoing calls by the Auto Guard feature. When ASSIGN appears in the display the trunk line is blocked. DEASSIGN means the trunk line is in use by the system. Auto Guard automatically blocks a trunk when the system detects no dial tone on a trunk.

When a trunk is Assigned (Blocked):

When a trunk is in ASSIGN status (blocked), cancel the Auto Guard as follows:

1. Choose

[AGrd]

.

2. Choose

[Tk#]

and dial a trunk number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose [Canc] to deactivate (DEASSIGN message appears).

4. Choose

[Exit]

or

SPKR

to terminate.

Attendant Features

Trunk Setup Features

233 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

5. Make an external call on the specific trunk. If the call goes through, the line is okay.

If the trunk is still blocked, call the technician and reactivate Auto Guard, by following

Steps

1

and

2

above and choosing

[Set]

to activate (ASSIGN message appears).

[Blck]

Central Office (CO) Block is used to view which of the trunks have been blocked at the central office. When

ASSIGN appears in the display the trunk line is blocked for both outgoing and incoming calls. DEASSIGN means the trunk line is in use by the system.

[LAR]

Look Ahead Routing is used to view the status of trunks/Dial Services that have been automatically blocked from use for outgoing calls. The Coral system automatically blocks a trunk/Dial Service in case of a failure to establish an outgoing connection via that trunk/Dial Service. The LAR Block feature enables an attendant to manually block/unblock the failed trunk/Dial Service.

When ASSIGN appears in the display the trunk/Dial Service line is blocked. DEASSIGN means the trunk/

Dial Service line is in use by the system.

After unblocking a trunk/Dial Service, make an external call on the specific trunk/Dial Service. If the call goes through, the trunk/Dial Service is unblocked. If the trunk/Dial Service is still blocked, call the technician and re-activate LAR Block.

If LAR Block activation failed due to insufficient resources (the system ran out of LAR Service Timers), the message NO RESOURCE appears upon dialing activation code.

NOTE! If the trunk/Dial Service was manually blocked, it can only be unblocked manually. Automatic unblock will not work in this case.

‰

[DIL-x]

‰

‰

‰

[DIL]

[N1]

[N2]

Direct In Line (DIL) is used to program incoming CO lines to ring directly at a specific destination depending on the required service mode (Day, Night 1, Night 2), without intervention. Possible destinations are operator, station, hunt group, boss group, UNA/central bell, public speed call, voice mail, modem, group

call, pre-recorded DVMS message, wait queue and network number.

DIL at Day service period.

DIL at Night 1 service period.

DIL at Night 2 service period.

Attendant Features

Trunk Setup Features

234 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[BOut]

[Drop]

[HotI]

[HotD]

[IncO]

[OutO]

‰

[Rsvd]

Busy Out is used to block any trunk for both incoming and outgoing calls. (This feature may be used to block faulty trunks until the CO service is restored.) When ASSIGN appears in the display the trunk line is blocked.

DEASSIGN means the trunk line is in use by the system.

Drop No Dial is used to program an outgoing trunk to be dropped when a caller does not dial the first digit within a system-wide time limit. The trunk is then made available to other users.

Hot Trunk Immediate is used to program an outgoing trunk so that the trunk automatically and immediately connects to the system.

Hot Trunk Delay is used to program an outgoing trunk to automatically connect to the system, after first digit time-out, when no dialing has taken place.

Incoming Only is used to reserve any trunk for incoming calls only, thereby preventing outgoing calls on that trunk.

Outgoing Only is used to reserve any trunk for outgoing calls only. All incoming calls on that trunk will continue ringing with no answer and will not be transferred to any destination.

Reserved To is used to reserve any trunk and trunk group to a specific station or boss group. The reservation will prevent any other stations or boss group stations from making outgoing calls on these trunks.

Attendant Features

Trunk Setup Features

235 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Operating features marked with

:

1. Choose the feature soft key (

[AGrd]

,

[LAR]

,

[Blck]

,

[BOut]

,

[Drop]

,

[HotI]

,

[HotD]

,

[IncO]

,

[OutO]

).

2. Choose

[Tk#]

and dial a trunk number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose

[Set]

to activate (ASSIGN message appears), or

Choose [Canc] to deactivate (DEASSIGN message appears).

4. Choose

[Exit]

or

SPKR

to terminate.

Operating features marked with ‰:

1. Choose the feature soft key (

[DIL]

,

[N1]

,

[N2]

,

[Rsvd]

).

2. Choose

[Tk#]

and dial a trunk number, or scroll through the list using .

3. Choose

[Dest]

and dial the destination number, or

Choose [Canc] to cancel feature.

4. Choose

[Exit]

or

SPKR

to terminate.

Attendant Features

Trunk Setup Features

236 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

CO Trunk Number

(as listed in your local telephone directory)

Coral

Trunk

Number

Incoming CO lines ring directly at the following destinations according to Service Mode

DAY

[DIL]

NIGHT 1

[N1]

NIGHT 2

[N2]

Outgoing

CO Lines

Reserved To

[Rsvd]

Power Fail

Destination

(programmed by authorized technician or system administrator)

Attendant Features

Trunk Setup Features

237 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Setup

Overview

The general features of your phone can quickly and easily be configured using the soft keys. Many of these features will only need to be configured once, however they can easily be reconfigured at any future stage should your requirements change.

The following pages detail the setup and configuration options:

Coral Telephony Features

..........................................................page 239

User Definitions Menu

................................................................page 246

System Definitions Menu

............................................................page 249

NOTE! The SysDef Menu is intended for system administrators or qualified technicians only since changing your phone’s setup configuration could cause it to malfunction. Consequently, this guide only provides an overview of the SysDef menu. For information about the SysDef Menu, system administrators can refer to the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, and T208M/BL Installation Manual

.

Setup

Overview

238 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Coral Telephony Features

The Feature Setup menu enables you to adjust the general features of your phone.

Press

[fSet]

to access the Feature Setup options.

Page 1

↑→ COS

10:50 26 May 2007 Company xyz user name station number

[fSet]

Trc Room

Page 2

Feature Setup

↓→ AAns

VPAA

The following pages detail the general feature setup options:

•Auto Answer,

page 240

•Voice Page Auto Answer,

page 240

•Voice Page Receive,

page 240

•Elapsed Time Display,

page 240

•Headset Only,

page 241

•Idle Display,

page 242

•Language,

page 242

•Passcode,

page 242

•Program Key,

page 243

•Preference,

page 243

•Private Library,

page 244

VPR

Setup

Coral Telephony Features

239

Eps

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[[AAns]

[VPAA]

[VPR]

[Elps]

•Security Line,

page 244

•Do Not Disturb - Whisper Page,

page 245

•Privacy,

page 245

•Exclusive Hold,

page 245

•Auto Set Relocate,

page 245

Auto Answer activates your phone to answer all incoming calls automatically via the speakerphone after a predetermined number of rings. Press

[AAns]

once to activate; press again to deactivate. When activated, a bullet is displayed next to

[AAns]

.

CAUTION!

Leaving your workstation while Auto Answer is activated will cause your station to answer an incoming call. All conversations in the room can be heard. A trunk call trapped in Auto Answer could lock up the trunk until released by the system.

Voice Page Auto Answer activates your phone to answer all incoming Voice Pages automatically via the speakerphone after a predetermined number of rings. It is relevant only when

[VPR]

is activated.

Press

[VPAA]

once to activate; press again to deactivate.

When activated, a bullet is displayed next to

[VPAA]

.

Voice Page Receive toggles the availability of your station to receive Voice Pages. Press

[VPR]

once to activate; press again to deactivate. When activated, a bullet is displayed next to

[VPR]

.

Elapsed Time Display toggles the display of the time spent during an incoming or outgoing external or network call. When activated from idle, Elapsed Time makes the duration of a call automatically display

Setup

Coral Telephony Features

240 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Head] whenever the call is established. When activated during a call, Elapsed Time displays duration of the current call.

The elapsed time is shown in HH:MM:SS format up to (13 hours) 12:59:59.

NOTE! The system may be programmed with a limit on the duration of your external calls. Once this limit is reached, the call will be automatically disconnected.

From Idle:

•Press

[fSet] [Elps]

once to activate; press again to deactivate; a bullet is displayed next to

[Elps]

on the Setup screen, and next to

[Elps]

that is displayed whilst on a call.

During a call:

•Press

[Elps]

once to activate or deactivate the Elapsed Time display. When the conversation is over, the

Elapsed Time feature reverts to the state it was set to before the conversation started.

Headset Only. This feature is designed for users operating in Headset mode. When activated, the Headset

Only feature causes calls to be conducted via the headset and disables the microphone and loudspeaker, along with the features that use these devices (e.g. voice page). Calls are conducted via the headset, even if the cradle switch is on-hook.

Press

[Head]

to activate and deactivate the Headset Only feature; when activated, a bullet is displayed next to

[Head]

. See

Headset Only on page 129

.

Setup

Coral Telephony Features

241 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Dsp]

[Lang]

[Pass]

Idle Display. When in Idle mode, the first line of the display shows the time, date and site name, and the second line displays your name and station number. Press

[Dsp]

to toggle the display of the system lines on/off.

Language. Use this feature to set the language for your phone display. The languages available differ according to the country. Scroll using

[Next]

and

[Prev]

, and then press

[Set]

to chose the language.

Passcode. Your phone can be defined with a unique passcode known only to you. This passcode allows you

(if defined in your COS) to operate the following features:

•Auto Set Relocate (see

page 64

)

•COS Switchover (see

page 93

)

•Executive Privilege (see

page 110

)

•Freedom (IRSS) (see

page 116

)

•Phone Lock (see

page 166

)

You can define the four-digit passcode for your phone only at your own phone. Save your passcode in a safe place.

To define your passcode (when no passcode is currently defined):

1. Press

[Pass]

.

2. Enter your new passcode number at the prompt.

3. Redial the number to confirm, and listen for the confirmation tone.

To change your passcode:

1. Press

[Pass]

.

2. Enter your old passcode number at the prompt, followed by your new passcode number.

3. Redial the number to confirm, and listen for the confirmation tone.

Setup

Coral Telephony Features

242 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Prog]

[Pref]

CAUTION!

Once a passcode has been defined, the code is known only to you. If you forget the passcode you will not be able to utilize the features that require the code. Therefore, write your passcode number in a secure place for future reference.

Program Key. The phone comes equipped with 9 system-defined (fixed) keys as well as user programmable keys. You are able to program most of the programmable keys from the phone itself. The programmable keys may be assigned to directly access other stations, station groups, trunks, trunk groups, or system features.

See

Programming: Feature Keys on page 167

for instructions on how to program a DSS key.

Preference is used to prioritize specific trunk or line connections for your phone. This causes the system to automatically choose the available line, loop or trunk in prioritized order when placing a call (lifting the handset, pressing

SPKR

or dialing a number).

To view the priorities:

1. Press

[Next]

to scroll through the list.

2. Listen for the confirmation tone.

To cancel priorities:

1. Press

[Canc] or dial the cancellation code

8

.

2. Listen for the confirmation tone.

Setup

Coral Telephony Features

243 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Lib]

[Safe]

To select priorities:

1. Select the required destinations by pressing the programmed DSS keys.

You can program a maximum of six priorities in any order:

OUTSIDE Line: trunk/trunk group/dial service or routing access

LOOP (default access code #121)

LOOP Originating Only (default access code #125)

Boss Group Line Key

ELA Line Key

2. Press

[Set]

or dial the activation code

9

3. Listen for the confirmation tone.

NOTES!

• If you intend to select an OUTSIDE line as the first priority, you must program a LOOP or LINE key to be able to dial internal numbers. When activating a feature, press LOOP or LINE first, then dial the required number.

• This feature is useful if you make mostly trunk (external) calls. Assign a preference to an outside line(s), and each time you make a call, you will be connected directly to an external trunk.

Private Library is used to program your personal Speed Dial Directory. A Private Library can be used to speed dial long numbers. Also, you can use a Private Library to dial external or network numbers for features that allow only internal destinations such as Call Forward, Divert and Hunt features.

For a full explanation of this feature, see

Speed Dialing: Private Library on page 191

.

Security Line is used to block another user from employing the Break In feature on your phone extension.

All Call Waiting and Break In feature tones are blocked. When activated, a caller attempting to break in to your station will receive a reorder tone. Only a station that has Security override privilege can break into your secured phone.

Press the

[Safe]

toggle switch to activate, and again to deactivate. A bullet is displayed next to

[Safe]

to indicate when the feature is activated.

Setup

Coral Telephony Features

244 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[wDND]

[Priv]

[eHld]

[Move]

[IRSS]

Do Not Disturb - Whisper Page is irrelevant on the current version of the phone.

NOTE! Whisper page receiving is not available on the current version of the phone.

Privacy. As a Boss Group member, you can put your phone into Privacy mode. This prevents other members of your Boss Group from accidentally joining your conversations. See

Boss Groups: Privacy on page 69

.

1. To activate Privacy, press

[fSet] [Priv]

.

The message PRIVACY is displayed.

When this feature is activated, a bullet appears next to

[Priv]

.

2. To cancel Privacy, press

[Priv]

again.

The message NO PRIVACY is displayed.

Exclusive Hold. As a Boss Group member, you can put your phone into Exclusive Hold mode. This ensures that a call placed on hold can be retrieved only at your station. If Exclusive Hold is cancelled, the call put on hold can be retrieved by any other member of your Boss Group.

See

Boss Groups: Exclusive Hold on page 70

.

1. To activate Exclusive Hold, press

[fSet] [eHld]

.

The message EXCLUSIVE HOLD is displayed.

When this feature is activated, a bullet appears next to

[eHld]

.

2. To cancel Exclusive Hold, press

[eHld]

again.

The message NON EXCL. HOLD is displayed.

Auto Set Relocate (move station) allows you to move your station and all your station’s predefined features to a new location.

See

Auto Set Relocate on page 64

.

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom enables you to connect an off-site non-Coral phone

(such as your home phone or mobile) to the Coral and make calls from within the system.

See

Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) - Freedom on page 133

.

Setup

Coral Telephony Features

245 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

User Definitions Menu

The Userdef function is used for setting various operating parameters for your phone, as well as general maintenance functions. These options are set with their factory default values. However, you may wish to change the maintenance options

to suit your individual needs. To access the setup options, press and hold OK until the Main Menu appears (see

page 49

), and then choose Userdef; the Userdef menu options appear on the display panel.

Userdef:

Ring Volume

Tone Type

Esc

Userdef:

Ring Volume

Tone Type

Key Click

Time Zone

Software Version

Esc

Userdef :

Ring Volume

Tone Type

Key Click

Time Zone

Software Version

Userdef:

Time Zone

Software Version

Esc

T207M & T207M/NP Userdef Menu Options T208M & T208M/BL Userdef Menu Options

Setup

User Definitions Menu

246 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Setup

Option

Description Method

Ring

Volume

Ring Type

Used to adjust the ring volume of your phone

.

To adjust the ring tone volume:

1. Choose Ring Volume.

2. Adjust volume using the volume key (see

Ring Adjustment on page 29

).

3. Press [Save].

Used to adjust the ring type of your phone in order to distinguish between incoming internal, external and voice page calls

.

To change the ring type:

1. Choose Ring Type.

2. Choose Internal, External or Voice Page (see

Paging: Voice

Paging on page 161 )

3. Press [Edit].

4. Choose the required ring type.

5. Press [Esc].

Tone Type

Used to change the call progress tone plan (dial tone, busy tone, etc.) of your phone to match the local standard.

To change the tone type:

1. Choose Tone Type.

2. Press [Edit].

3. Choose the required country’s tone type.

4. Press [Esc].

Key Click

Used to turn the short beep sound heard when pressing key pad buttons on or off.

To turn key click on/off:

1. Choose Key Click.

2. Press [Edit].

3. Choose [Yes] to turn key click on or [No] to turn it off.

4. Press [Save] [Esc].

Setup

User Definitions Menu

247 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Setup

Option

Time

Zone

Software

Version

Description Method

You can adjust the GMT time zone for your phone, if it is different from the time zone defined for the Coral system.

Adjust your phone’s time zone settings if you use time-related

Coral features, such as the

Keyset Idle Display Clock,

Wake-up, Reminder, and Call

Log features are used. In these cases the phone clock is automatically adjusted to follow the localized time definitions.

To adjust the GMT time zone:

1. Choose Time Zone.

2. Press [Edit].

3. Choose the required time zone.

4. Press [Esc].

Software Version is used to view your phone’s version.

To view your phone’s software version:

1. Press Software Version.

2. Press [Esc].

Setup

User Definitions Menu

248 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

System Definitions Menu

The Sysdef function is primarily used for setting various operating parameters for your phone by your system administrator or qualified technician. These options are set with their factory default values but may be edited as required. To access the setup options, press and hold OK until the Main Menu appears (see

page 49

), and then choose Sysdef; the Sysdef menu options

appear on the display panel.

CAUTION! A password is required as a reminder that these parameters are sensitive and affect the operation of your phone. This section provides a brief overview of the options available from the Sysdef menu. Changing your phone’s setup configuration could cause your phone to malfunction. For a detailed explanation of the Sysdef menu, system administrators can refer to the Installation manual.

The Sysdef menu consists of the following menus and options:

Menus Options

Information • Used to view current IP addresses and parameters for your phone

IP

Parameters

Operating

Mode

• Used to enter/edit IP addresses and parameters for your phone

• Survivability - Enable the system survivability feature for the phone

• Zip Tone - Configure the phone to work in

Zip Tone

mode

Diagnostics • Packets Lost - Displays the amount of packets lost (in percentage) since the last connection

• Average Delay - Displays the average delay statistic since the last connection

• Jitter - Displays packets lost since last connection

• Speed - Displays the network connection speed (10 or 100 Mbps)

• Duplex Mode - Displays the duplex mode (Full or Half)

Setup

System Definitions Menu

249 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Appendix A: Glossary

Term Description

ACD/UCD Group

Attendant/Operator

Auto Transfer

Automatic Call Distribution and Uniform Call Distribution. Calls enter the system and are automatically routed to the ACD or UCD members based upon system definitions of availability and overflow.

The individual responsible for answering incoming calls and transferring them to their required destinations, as well as attending to trunk, system and station feature controls.

When auto transfer is defined at a station, dialing the number to which a call is to be transferred will automatically transfer the call; use of the XFER key is not necessary. This

feature is typically utilized by attendants. (See also

Transfer/Xfer on page 254

.)

Boss Group

A Boss Group is a number of stations operating together in which the individual station may or may not ring simultaneously as defined by the system per Boss Group. The appropriate line key will flash at all stations set to ring at a specific station; the call can be either transferred to any group member or picked up by any group member when not in exclusive hold. Any group member can join a conversation by merely pressing the appropriate illuminated line key. However, only one additional member can join, and this is only when the original group member is not in privacy mode.

Class Of Service (COS) A Class-of-Service (COS) consists of a list of features that are available to the telephone line user. However, the user may be denied certain features. Each internal telephone is marked with two classes-of-service, Primary and Secondary, which can be defined differently. In order to increase flexibility, the Coral system allows switching between the

Primary and Secondary COS, but only one COS can be utilized at a time. When the telephone is in check-out mode, the telephone is marked by a system-wide defined COS and the user is denied this feature.

Appendix A: Glossary 250 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Term

CO Trunk Number

(Incoming)

Database

Dial

Disconnect

Direct Station

Selection (DSS)

ELA Group

Extension

Description

The number that is dialed by an outside telephone user from the public network (through the Central Office) in order to call into the Coral system for an internal station. (Number listed in the local telephone directory).

The memory in which the ‘flexible database system information’ is stored. Programming the database is usually carried out during installation, however, it is field- or remotely- modifiable.

For the purpose of this guide “Dial” means entering the relevant digits by pressing the number on the Dial Pad (Keypad) that operates a feature or sends a call to a destination.

Dial also means pressing a key programmed with the feature or destination (DSS).

You may disconnect from an ongoing call by either pressing the Speaker key or by manually replacing the handset onto its cradle (i.e. hang up).

Permits you to make or transfer a call to an extension by using a defined key. DSS can also be used on all accessible system ports. Instead of dialing a number this can be done by pressing the programmed key. Also provides busy lamp field for programmed stations.

ELA Group is a number of stations (up to 32) operating together in which the individual stations share a common line appearance. When an ELA-defined line key flashes, it flashes at all the member stations. Any member may answer the call by pressing the flashing line key. If the ELA call is put on hold, the line key flashes at all the member stations and any member (provided the privacy feature is not activated) may break-in to the call by pressing the flashing line key. To place a call, a member may press any available line key; the line key remains lit at all member stations for the duration of the call.

Each Coral internal telephone is called a station or an extension.

Appendix A: Glossary 251 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Term Description

Forced Account Code

A feature that forces the station user to dial an account code before having access to an outside line. A display equipped keyset user attempting to access an outside line without dialing the account code will receive the message “ENTER ACCOUNT #” on the display.

After dialing the account code, the user will be able to continue dialing the intended number.

Idle

Intercept

A station or extension that is not ringing or busy, therefore available for use.

If you misdial or dial an unauthorized code (restricted to you), you will receive a reorder tone or will be routed directly to the attendant/operator/master extension, as defined in your system.

Off-Hook

LINE

Lifting the telephone handset from its cradle has the same effect as pressing a preprogrammed LOOP, LINE or SPKR fixed key, but automatically inhibits the

Speakerphone facility. Off- hook provides the dial tone, which then enables you to dial or activate a feature.

The line key is used for making and receiving calls when the station is defined as a member of a Boss group or an ELA group. When several line keys are in use, the station will act as if it is a multi-line instrument.

LOOP

On-Hook

Outside Line Access

Code

Port

The loop key is used for making and receiving calls. When several loop keys are in use the station will act as if it is a multi-line instrument.

Replacing the telephone handset on its cradle – has the same effect as pressing the

[Exit] or SPKR key.

A series of digits which must be dialed or keyed in order to gain access to a trunk or trunk group.

Provides access to a device, station or trunk from within the system.

Appendix A: Glossary 252 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

TEM

Time-Out

Term

Recall- Automatic

Station

Station Group

System-defined

Telephony Features

Description

The call that you have transferred to another extension that is busy or that does not answer, or that you have put on ‘hold’, which has returned to you after a predetermined time-out period.

Each Coral internal telephone is called a station or an extension.

A number of stations linked together (members) for a common function, such as ACD/

UCD group or Boss group. A station can be defined as a member of many ACD/UCD groups and/or Boss groups.

Ask your system administrator for these values.

The phone is part of the Coral family of telephones that have access to a rich array of telephony features that are user activated. The features supplied by the Coral system appear in the phone display whenever the phone is engaged.

Programmable expansion module for the T207M, T208M, T207S and T208S series telephone sets. Each module provides an additional 22(x2) programmable buttons.

A predetermined period of time allowed to complete a specific function. If the function is not completed, for example dialing, the caller is dropped and the exchange equipment freed for other users. (See also

Recall- Automatic above.)

Appendix A: Glossary 253 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Term

Transfer/Xfer

Trunk

Trunk Group

Trunk Number

Verified Forced

Account Code (VFAC)

Description

While engaged on a call you can initiate a feature by pressing the XFER (Transfer) key.

XFER provides you with a distinctive dial tone, which enables you to either transfer the call, or activate a feature. XFER puts the second party on Hold and provides one of the following: music, reorder tone, busy tone or no sound at all, as defined system-wide. If your Coral system is connected to another PABX you may have to use the FLASH key instead of the XFER key. The XFER key is used for local Coral system features, while the FLASH key is used to flash on trunks. In some systems, if you are not connected to a

DTMF destination, transfer can be carried out by dialing ‘1’ instead of pressing the XFER key. In some systems transfer is applied automatically when you dial a number. (See

also

Auto Transfer on page 250 .)

An outside line from the telephone company that terminates at the customer’s location.

A number of trunks linked together (members) for a common outgoing function.

The access code number that is dialed or keyed by station user in order to gain access to a specific outside line.

A feature that forces the station user to dial a secret authorization account code before accessing an outside line. Before dialing is allowed, VFAC verifies the presence of the account code. If the code is not present, dialing is blocked. When the code is found, dialing is allowed. Except for verification, VFAC is the same as Forced Account Code.

Appendix A: Glossary 254 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Appendix B: Tones

Tones are audible signals of various frequencies that give information about the status of calls and features. While using the

Coral system, many different tones will be heard. These tones may vary for different locations, as each system is customized during installation. While the sounds of the tones themselves are not described, their general use is discussed below. In order to familiarize yourself with these tones, try accessing various features and listen to the resultant tone signals. The most frequently heard tones are:

Tone Description

Break-In/Break-Out Tone A warning tone received by a station user indicating that a third party has broken into, or is leaving (breaking out) an existing conversation.

Break-In Warning

Tone heard during the entire break-in period. Indicates that a third party is listening (not used in North America).

Busy Tone

Call Waiting Tone

Tone heard when the destination you have dialed (extension or trunk) is busy.

Tone heard at your station while engaged on a call or activating a feature indicating that another call is waiting to be answered (this appears only when multi-appearance is defined for your station).

Confirmation Tone

Dial Tone

Tone heard indicating that the telephony feature has been activated or deactivated.

Tone heard after off-hooking (lifting) your handset from idle.

Appendix B: Tones 255 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Tone Description

Distinctive Dial Tone

This tone indicates that certain features are in use at your phone, for example, when you have programmed your phone not to receive calls with either Call

Forward All, or Do Not Disturb, and you lift the handset. DDT is also heard between patterns of digits when dialing certain features, for example, Account

Code feature. When the following features are applied at your telephone, the distinctive dial tone is heard when the handset is lifted:

• Call Forward All

• Call Forward All External

• Do Not Disturb

• Messages Waiting

• Secondary COS

Key Click

Reorder Tone

When defined for the phone, a tone heard when pressing any key on the dial pad.

You hear this tone at your phone if:

• You try to access a denied feature or misdial

• You have stayed off-hook for too long before dialing

• The station you have called does not answer within the predetermined interval

• The station you have called is in Do Not Disturb status

Tone is heard when the destination you have dialed is ringing.

Ringback Tone

Second Ringback Tone

Tone that the calling party hears indicating that the called party is currently busy.

When the called party disconnects, the waiting call will be the next one ringing to the destination.

Speaker Status Tone

Indicates that the second conversing party’s keyset is in speakerphone mode.

Enables you to keep your privacy when you call someone who answered the call or placed the call back to the speaker, and there are other people in the phone environment.

Appendix B: Tones 256 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Tone

Tick Tone

VIP Ring Tone

Voice Paging Tone

Whisper Tone

Description

A tone indicating that you may continue dialing.

A warbling tone heard when receiving a call from a station designated as VIP.

Enables you to identify an incoming call as a high priority call.

A warbling tone heard when using the paging facility.

Tone heard during a conversation indicating that a Whisper Page is about to be received from a third party. The second (conversing) party does not hear the tone.

NOTE! Whisper page receiving is not available on the current version of the phone.

Appendix B: Tones 257 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Appendix C: LED Indications (Programmable Keys)

LED indications visually show the state of certain features. LEDs typically indicate that a feature is either activated (steady on) or is pending further commands or needs additional information (flashing). The LED indications usually go hand-in-hand with various messages when equipped with a display.

LED Indications Description

Off

Wink

Flashing

Steady On

Indicates that the feature is inactive or the DSS destination is idle.

A signal that flashes at a fast rate of 120 pulses per minute (400/100mS). Typically indicates that a call is on hold or park, normally the telephone does not ring.

A signal that flashes at a slow rate of 60 pulses per minute (800/200mS). Typically indicates that a call is pending, in most cases the station will also ring.

Indicates that a feature programmed on that key is active. When defined as DSS, indicates that the port designated by this key is in use. When defined as a loop, line or speaker indicates that a call is in progress.

Message Lamp

Dedicated LED for message waiting indication. The message lamp may be enabled or disabled system-wide.

HEADSET, MUTE and SPKR

See

Using the Fixed Function Keys on page 20

NOTE! In special cases the key may operate differently. See the relevant feature for explanations of various messages that can appear.

Appendix C: LED Indications (Programmable Keys) 258 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers

11

16

17

18

8

9

10

Cause #

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

CODE MEANING ACTION

valid cause code not yet received unallocated (unassigned) number no route to specified transit network check number and call again* notify system administrator notify system administrator no route to destination send special information tone misdialed trunk prefix channel unacceptable notify system administrator* call awarded and being delivered in an established channel prefix 0 dialed but not allowed no action prefix 1 dialed but not allowed prefix 1 dialed but not required more digits received than allowed normal clearing (message displayed as text) user busy (message displayed as text) no user responding no action* call later call later

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers 259 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Cause #

31

33

34

35

27

28

29

30

37

38

39

23

24

25

26

19

21

22

CODE MEANING

no answer from user (user alerted) call rejected number changed reverse charging rejected call suspended call resumed non-selecting user clearing destination out of order invalid format (address incomplete) facility rejected response to status inquiry normal unspecified circuit out of order no circuit/channel available destination unattainable degraded service network out of order transit delay range cannot be achieved

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers 260

ACTION

call later call later check number and call again* call later check number and call again* notify system administrator no action* call later* wait and call later

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Cause #

52

53

54

55

47

49

50

51

56

57

58

43

44

45

46

40

41

42

CODE MEANING

throughput range cannot be achieved temporary failure switching equipment congestion access information discarded requested circuit/channel not available preempted precedence call blocked resource unavailable, unspecified quality of service not available requested facility not subscribed reverse charging not allowed outgoing calls barred outgoing calls barred within GUG incoming calls barred incoming calls barred within GUG call waiting not subscribed bearer capability not authorized bearer capability not presently available

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers 261

ACTION

call later* call later no action* notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator call later

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Cause #

63

65

66

67

68

69

70

84

85

86

79

81

82

83

87

CODE MEANING

service or option not available, unspecified bearer capability not implemented

ACTION

notify system administrator check destination is correct, try again from different compatible terminal, notify system administrator if message returns notify system administrator channel type not implemented transit network selection not implemented message not implemented requested facility not implemented only restricted digital information bearer capability is available service or option not implemented, unspecified invalid call reference value channel does not exist a suspended call exists, but this call identity does not call identity in use no call suspended call having the requested call identity has been cleared called user not member of GUG notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator no action* no action* no action* no action*

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers 262 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

89

90

95

97

98

91

92

95

93

99

100

101

102

103

Cause #

88

CODE MEANING

incompatible destination

ACTION

check destination is correct, try again from different compatible terminal, notify system administrator if message returns non-existent abbreviated address destination address missing, and direct call not subscribed invalid transit network selection invalid facility parameter invalid message, unspecified mandatory information element is missing invalid message, unspecified message type non-existent or not implemented message not compatible with call state or messages type non-existent or not implemented information element non-existent or not implemented invalid information element contents message not compatible with call state recovery on timer expiry mandatory information element length error notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator notify system administrator no action*

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers 263 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Cause # CODE MEANING ACTION

111

112

113 protocol error, unspecified type of protocol not available

ISUP not available notify system administrator

127 interworking, unspecified notify system administrator

* If the message returns frequently, notify your system administrator

Appendix D: ISDN Cause Numbers 264 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Appendix E: Troubleshooting

Failure Messages

The following failure messages may appear on your phone to indicate there is a connection error. See the table below to determine the cause of the problem and the solution.

Failure Message

Check Network

Connection

CODEC MISMATCH

IP Address not Legal

No DNS server address

No Net Mask

NO PHYSICAL LINK

Problem Solution / Action

The keyset initialized but cannot connect to the network.

Check the connection to the LAN/PC and then reboot.

Each phone operates a specific set of codecs that determines the compression rate at which the phone communicates with the Coral.

This message indicates that the compression rate of your phone has not been correctly defined in the

Class of Service (COS).

Notify your system administrator.

The static Self IP Address defined in the phone is invald.

The DNS Server IP Address was not provided by the DHCP Server. There is no DNS Server defined in the phone.

Notify your system administrator

Notify your system administrator.

There is no Subnet Mask configured in the phone. Notify your system administrator.

Your phone is not connected to the network.

Check all wires, connections, hubs and switches to determine if any parts or components are unplugged or damaged.

Appendix E: Troubleshooting 265 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Failure Message Problem

Searching CA no. x (1-10) The system is searching for a Call Agent with a correct IP address.

If the message persists, this indicates that the phone is unable to communicate with the UGW card.

Trying DHCP server...

For keysets with dynamic IP addresses, indicates that the system is attempting to connect to the

DHCP server upon keyset initialization.

If the message persists, indicates that there is no response from the DHCP server.

Solution / Action

Notify your system administrator.

If there is no connection to the network, check the connection to the LAN/PC and then reboot. If the problem persists, notify your system administrator that there is a problem with the DHCP server functionality (DHCP server is inactive on the network).

Notify your system administrator.

Trying DNS server...

For keysets with static IP addresses, indicates that:

• Primary DNS server address has been defined in the phone

• No Call Agent IP address has been defined in the phone

WRONG ZONE SETUP The phone is attempting to connect to a UGW in a zone in which it is not configured.

Notify your system administrator.

Appendix E: Troubleshooting 266 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

This appendix details the rich array of options available on your phone. Features are accessed by use of the context-sensitive soft keys. The features can also be operated by using their dial codes, so that they may be programmed into the programmable keys.

Soft Key

These are the soft key options that appear on the bottom line of the display area of your phone. This column is arranged in alphabetical order. In situations where there are two or three features, one standard, one attendant, and one boss group:

• The attendant feature takes the format

aXXX

(for example,

Trc

and

aTrc

, where

Trc

is the standard feature and

aTrc

is the attendant feature).

• The boss group feature takes the format

bXXX

.

(for example,

Fwd

and

bFwd

, where

Fwd

is the standard feature and

bFwd

is the boss group feature).

Source

This is the route taken using the soft keys to reach this soft key message.

Feat corresponds to the idle state (or press and hold OK then choose

[Features]

.

Call

corresponds to the phone state during a call (ongoing, ringing, etc.).

Feature Code

The feature code is the default code (numbering plan) that is used to operate the relevant feature using the dial pad. The feature code can be used to pre-program the phone DSS buttons with the specific feature.

When the soft key links to a sub-menu (e.g. pressing [Fwd] opens a list of forwarding options), “MENU” is used to show that this is a multilevel menu.

See

page 167

for instructions on how to program a feature into a programmable key by using its feature code.

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 267 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Reference

The following table lists details of each soft key and location of the feature in this manual.

Soft Key Information

[#Out]

[*Out]

[-Dsp]

[1sec] -

[9sec]

[2Rng]

Soft Key Source Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

fSet>Lib>Code fSet>Lib>Code **

Setup>PrvLib>Code #8 fSet>Lib>Dly

## Private Library (#193) – Dial # Out

Private Library (#193) – Dial * Out

Private Library (#193) – Display '-'

3

1 - 39 Private Library (#193) – Delay 1-9 Seconds

Call hf-8

[3Way]

[AAns]

[ACD]

[ActC]

[Add]

[AddO]

Call fSet

Feat

Feat, Call

Redl>ARdl

GpCl

#122

#138

MENU

#1990

#178

#1449

Send Call Wait tone / CampOn Offhook / Call Offer / 2 nd

Ring

Xfer: when COS is defined for 3-Way Conference Call

Auto Answer (on/off)

ACD & UCD Hunt Groups:

[Wait] [ID] [LogI] [pLog] [R/R] [rUCD] [WrpT] [WrpC] [Busy]

Account Code

Auto Redial - Add number to the list

Group call Temporary (Add on) Group Call

Reference

page 191 page 191 page 191 page 191

page 34

page 203

page 238

page 59

page 57

page 179

page 121

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 268 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source

[AddP]

[aFwd]

[All]

[All]

[All]

[AGrd]

[AllS]

[Alrm]

[AM]

[ARdl]

[aRS]

[aTrc]

[ATT2]

[aWk]

GpCl, AddO

Feat bFwd aFwd

FlxC tSet

Chrg>RST

Sys

Remd, Wake,

Sys>Time, aWk

Redl, Call

Feat

Feat

Sys

Feat

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

#1449

MENU

Add Participant to Group Call

Attendant: Call Forward:

[All] [eAll] [Busy] [eBsy] [NA] [eNA] [Time] [eTim]

Boss Group Call Forward All #168

#168 Attendant Call Forward All

#17710 FlexiCall remote destination for ALL calls

#1998

#1978

#1997

2

Trunk AUTO GUARD

Attendant – Charge, Reset for all stations

Alarm Display

Used to set time to AM (between midnight and noon)

#178

MENU

MENU

#146

MENU

Auto Redial: when calling a trunk & from idle

Charge options: [Next] [CanA] [FrzA] [RstA] ] [Add]

Attendant Room Status options:

[RS0] [RS1]……[RS14] [RS15]

Attendant: Call Trace: [V/X] [Prnt]

Alternate Attendant Destination

Attendant Wake Up options: [Req] [Prnt]

269

Reference

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

page 121

page 212

page 71

page 212

page 111

page 233

page 223

page 227

page 232

page 179

page 212

page 217

page 227

page 220

Soft Key Source

Dir

Feat

Call

ACD

Fwd bFwd aFwd sSet tSet

Fwd

Fwd tSet

Call

Call

[BckS]

[bFwd]

[Brkr]

[Busy]

[Busy]

[Busy]

[Busy]

[Blck]

[Blck]

[BNA]

[BNA-E]

[BOut]

[BrkI]

[BrkI]

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

#3 Directory (##, #1994) Personal – (Backspace) Erase the last entered character

MENU Boss Group Call Forwarding options:

[All] [eAll] [Busy] [eBsy] [NA] [eNA] [Time] [eTim]

Station Blocking #153

#157

#147

#17705 Call Forward Busy/No Answer for External calls

#155 Trunk Busy Out

#124, hf-3

#124, hf-3

Trunk CO Blocked Display

Call Forward Busy/No Answer

Break-In

Do Not Disturb Override

#122

#1746

Xfer: when COS=Broker Call

Used by the Attendant to define Max Calls Waiting for Busy

ACD Group

#140

#167

#167

Call Forward Busy

Boss Group Call Forward Busy

Attendant Call Forward Busy

Reference

page 98

page 71

page 224

page 233

page 73 page 73

page 233

page 39

page 101

page 202

page 59

page 73

page 71

page 212

270 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Call]

[Camp]

[Camp]

[CanA]

[Canc]

[Char]

[Chng]

[ChkO]

[Chrg]

[CID]

[cLck]

[cIns]

[Code]

Soft Key

[CONF]

Source

Msg>Msg.

Feat

Call

Redl>ARdl

Dir

ACD>Busy sSet

Feat

Feat

Call

Feat fSet>Lib

Fixed function key

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

#175

#176

#176, hf-2

Message - Call Back

Camp-On/Call-Back

CampOn/Call-Back (appears when calling a port)

#1970

MENU

#1444

#1441

#1983

MENU

#178 Auto Redial - Cancel All numbers

#10, #*0 Cancel

N/A Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Toggle between digits and characters

#11, #*1 Max Calls Waiting for Busy ACD Group (#1746)

Station Check In/Out

Attendant Call Charge options: [Prnt] [RST]

Caller ID Control

CONFERENCE Lock (during conference)

#122N

CONFERENCE Inspect/Release Single Participant

MENU for Special Dial Codes, in Private Library (#193):

[End] [Free] [Puls] [Tone] [xDsp] [vDsp] [wtDT]

[-Dsp] [Flsh] [*Out] [#Out]

Xfer: when COS is defined for 3-Way Conference Call

Reference

page 144

page 84 page 84

page 179

page 86

page 98

page 59

page 224

page 222

page 81

page 91

page 92

page 191

page 203

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 271 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Conn]

[D/N2]

[Del]

[DelP]

[Dest]

[COS]

[Cslt]

[Date]

[D/N1]

[Dest]

[Dest]

[Dest]

[Dgt]

[Dial]

Soft Key Source

Call

Feat

Call

Sys>Time

Sys

Sys

Log

GpCl, AddO

PkUp

Call

Pickup

Msg>Msg. or

MSG fixed key

Dir

Msg>Msg. or

MSG fixed key

Default

Feature

Code

#122

What it Means

Reconnect to party on (hold, park, etc.)

Reference

#149

#122

#188

#185

#184

COS Switchover

Xfer: when COS is defined as Consultation Call

Time Date – Set Date

Day/Night1 - Service Mode Select

Day/Night2 - Service Mode Select

Delete call records

#1449 Delete Participant from Group Call

#180, 77 Call Pickup Directed (Destination)

#1322 Exclude Destination (Split Call)

#180, 77 Call Pickup Directed (Destination)

#175 Message - Leave A Message at another destination

##,

#1994

#175

Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Toggle between characters and digits

Message - Call Back

page 98

page 144

page 132

/

page 164

page 93

page 203

page 227 page 227 page 227

page 77

page 121

page 80

page 199

page 80

page 141

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 272 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Dial]

[Dial]

[Dial]

[Dial]

[DIL]

[DIR]

[Dir]

[Dir]

[Dly]

[DND]

[DND]

[Drop]

[Dsp]

[eAll]

[eAll]

Soft Key Source

Feat sSet tSet fSet

Fwd bFwd

Log>In

Log>Out

Dir

Log

Redl>ARdl tSet

Fixed function key

Dir

Feat fSet>Lib

Default

Feature

Code

N/A

What it Means Reference

Call log - Call Back (dial the selected entry from the call log)

page 77

*

N/A

Directory (##, #1994) – Place a call to the displayed contact

page 98

Used to dial the recognized number

page 77

#11, #*1 Auto Redial (#178) - Immediate Dial

#164 Trunk Direct In Line at DAY service

page 179

page 233

#1994N Directory phones

#9 Directory (##, #1994) – Access the personal directory subset only

#1994

MENU

Directory phones

page 94

page 98

page 94

Options for Delay Dialing X seconds, in Private Library (#193):

[1sec] [2sec] [3sec] [4sec] …[9sec]

page 191

#145

#1999

#162

#137

Do Not Disturb (or Attended / Unattended for Attendant)

Station Do-Not-Disturb

Trunk Drop On No Dial

Idle Display (on/off)

#17702 Call forward all for External calls

#17707 Boss Group - Call forward all for External calls

page 101

page 224

page 233

page 238

page 73

page 71

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 273 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source

[eNA]

[eNA]

[Enbl]

[End]

[eFlw]

[eHld]

[Elps]

[eNA]

[Esc]

[eTim]

[eAll]

[eBNA]

[eBsy]

[eBsy]

[eBsy]

[Edit] aFwd

Fwd

Fwd bFwd aFwd

Dir

Fwd fSet fSet, Call

Fwd bFwd aFwd

Redl>ARdl fSet>Lib>Code

Log

Fwd

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

#17707 Attendant - Call Forward All for External calls

#17705 Call Forward Busy/No Answer for External calls

#17701 Call Forward Busy for External calls

#17706 Boss Group Call Forward Busy for External calls

#17706 Attendant Call Forward Busy for External calls

#2 Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Edit the displayed entry

[BckS] [Spac] [LoCs] [UpCs] [Dgt] [Num]

[Save] [Dial] [Exit]

#17713 Follow me for External calls

#187 Boss Group: Exclusive Hold (on/off)

#129 Call Elapsed Time Display (on/off)

#17703 Call forward no answer for External calls

#17708 Boss Group - Call forward no answer for External calls

#17708 Attendant - Call forward no answer for External calls

#178

#0

Auto Redial - Activate

Private Library (#193) – End of number / Stop Dial

N/A Escape (Terminate or Release)

#17704 Call forward time for External calls

Reference

page 212

page 73 page 73

page 71

page 212

page 98

page 73

page 238 page 238

page 73

page 71

page 212

page 179

page 191

page 77

page 73

274 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[eTim]

[eTim]

[Exec]

[Exit]

[Exit]

[Ext.]

[Ext#]

[f-Dn]

Soft Key

[f-Up]

[Features]

[FlexC]

[Flsh]

[Flsh]

[Flw] bFwd aFwd

Feat

Source

CIns

FlxC fSet>Lib tSet, sSet tSet, sSet

Press and hold OK

Feat

Call fSet>Lib>Code

Fwd

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means Reference

#17709 Boss Group Call forward time for External calls

#17709 Attendant Call forward time for External calls

#170 Executive Privilege

N/A

#1983

#17711 FlexiCall remote destination for External calls

(#193) Private Library – used to enter Outside Line Access Code followed by External Phone #

#*5

Terminate or Release

Conference View/Release – Exit

#*3

Scroll Fast Backward

(Rapidly goes backward to the previously assigned feature in a scroll list)

Scroll Fast Forward

(Advances rapidly to the next assigned feature in a scroll list)

N/A

MENU

#150

#9

#189

page 71

page 212

page 110

page 92

page 111

page 191

“Features” used to reach Feature options, as shown during idle state

FlexiCall Remote Destination options: [All] [Ext.] [Int.]

page 49

page 111

Flash On Trunk (Calibrated Opening)

page 45

Private Library (#193) – Flash On Trunk (Calibrated Opening)

page 191

Follow Me

page 73

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 275 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source

[Free]

[fRls]

[fRls] fSet>Lib>Code

Call

CIns

[FrzA]

[fSet]

Redl>ARdl

Feat

[Fwd] Feat

[FwdA]

[GpCl]

Fwd, Call

Feat

[Grp] PkUp

[HEADSET] Fixed function key

[Head]

[HOLD] fSet

Fixed function key

[Hold]

[HotD]

Feat, Call tSet

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means Reference

#1 Private Library (#193) – Outpulsing Wait Period for Free

Dialing

#123 Forced Release

#11, #*1 Conference View/Release (#1983) - Forced Release a selected Participant

#*6

MENU

Auto Redial (#178) - Freeze All (Hold Set for all numbers)

Feature Setup options: [Ring] [AAns] [VPAA] [VPR] [Elps] [Head] [Dsp] [Lang]

[Pass] [Prog] [Pref] [Lib] [Safe] [Priv] [eHld] [Move] [IRSS]

page 191

page 39

page 89

page 179

page 238

MENU

#141

MENU

Call Forwarding options: [FwdA] [eAll] [Busy] [eBsy] [NA] [eNA] [BNA] [eBNA]

[Time] [eTim] [Flw] [eFlw]

Call Forward All: when phone rings OR from idle

page 73

page 73

Group Call Conference options: [RlsP] [RlsG] [AddO]

page 117

#181, 76 Call Pickup Group

#1302N Head Set Only (on/off)

#1302

#171N

Head Set Only (on/off)

Call Hold

#171

#161

Call Hold

Trunk Hot Delayed

page 80

page 238 page 238

page 132 page 132

page 233

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 276 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source

[Last]

[Lib]

[Lib]

[Lib#]

[Lib#]

[IRSS]

[Key Click]

[Lang]

[LAR]

[HotD]

[HotI]

[HotI]

[ID]

[In]

[IncO]

[Int.] sSet tSet tSet

ACD

Log tSet

FlxC fSet

OK>Userdef fSet tSet

Redl fSet

Sys

Sys>Lib fSet>Lib

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

#182

#160

#166

Station Hot Delay

Trunk Hot Immediate

Station Hot Immediate

#1973

N/A

ACD: Load ID

Incoming received calls

#158 Trunk Incoming Only

#17712 FlexiCall remote destination for Internal calls

#17714 Destination for IRSS (Individual Remote System Services)

N/A Key Click Programming

#1328

#1979

“Language” Multilingual Display

Look Ahead Routing – Block

#143, *

#193

#194

#194

#193

Last Number Redial

Programming Private Library

Programming Public Library

Public Library – Library Number#

Private Library – Used to enter specific Private Library number#

Reference

page 224

page 233

page 224

page 59

page 77

page 233

page 111

page 238

page 247

page 238

page 233

page 179

page 191

page 227

page 227

page 191

277 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[MSG]

[Msg.]

[Msg]

[MsgW]

[MUTE]

[Mute]

[N1]

[N2]

[Line]

[LoCs]

[Lock]

[Log]

[LogI]

[Move]

Soft Key Source

Call

Dir

Feat

Log

ACD fSet, AcdUcdACD

Fixed function key

Feat>Msg, Call

Feat

Feat>Msg, Call

Fixed function key

Call tSet tSet

#175N,

#5N

#175,

#5, hf-5

MENU

#156

#1320

#1320

#163

#165

Default

Feature

Code

#126

N/A

#148

N/A

#1974

N/A

What it Means Reference

Line for Boss Group Programmed key (Line # + Boss Group#)

page 67

Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Toggle between uppercase and lowercase characters

Phone Dial Lock

page 98

page 166

Call log

ACD: Log-In/Out

Move Station: Auto Set Relocate or Terminal Portability

(Default feature code Not Available)

Message (when calling a station or from idle)

page 77

page 59

page 64

page 20

Message (when calling a station or from idle)

page 141

Message options: [Msg.] [xMsg] [MsgW]

page 141

Attendant Message Waiting: when calling a station or from idle

page 143

Mute Microphone

page 155

Mute Microphone

Trunk Direct In Line at Night1 service

Trunk Direct In Line at Night2 service

page 155

page 233 page 233

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 278 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[Name]

[New]

[New]

[New]

[Next]

[Nite]

[NoTk]

[Num]

Soft Key

[NA]

[NA]

[Name]

[Number]

[Num]

[OCC]

[oDND]

Fwd bFwd

Dir

Log

Dir

Remd

Wake

PkUp sSet

Dir

Log

Call

Call

Call

Source

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means Reference

#142

#169

#5

N/A

#1

#172

#173

Call Forward No Answer

Boss Group - Call Forward No Answer

Directory (##, #1994) – Toggle between number and name of your contact

Used to display the party name instead of the number

Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Add a new entry

Reminder – Add New Time

Wakeup – Add New Time

page 73

page 71

page 98

page 77

page 98

page 183

page 205

#*2

#192

#154 Station Outgoing Call Restriction

#5, #128 Directory (##, #1994) – Toggle between name and number of your contact. [BckS] [Name] [Save] [Dial] [Exit]

N/A

#128

Advances forward through a scroll list one step at a time

Night Answer (Bell/UNA Pickup)

Used to display the party number instead of the name

Display port Number instead of port Name, for a system-wide period of time

page 80

page 224

page 98

page 77

#127

#124, hf-3

Send Tones (DTMF) for OCC (Other Common Carriers)

Do Not Disturb Override

page 156

page 101

279 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source

[OrgO]

[Orig]

[Out]

[OutO]

[Park]

[Par#]

[Pass]

[PgQ]

[PgQ1] -

[PQ10]

[PkUp]

[pLog]

[PM]

[Pref]

[Prev] sSet

SM, SM1

Log tSet

Feat, Call

CIns fSet

Feat, Call

PgQ

Feat

ACD

Remd, Wake,

Sys>Time, aWk fSet

Default

Feature

Code

#151

#1448

N/A

#190

#183,

#7, 79

#1983

#179

MENU

What it Means

Station Originating Only

Used to monitor the 1st conversing party.

Outgoing calls made

Trunk Outgoing Only

Call Park

Conference View/Release - Conference Participant #

Passcode Change

Page_Q Place/Pickup Call options:

[PgQ1] [PgQ2] ……[PgQ9] [PQ10]

Page Queue 1-10 7060-

7069

MENU

#1442

7

Pickup options to answer a ringing call: [Dest] [Grp] [Nite]

ACD: Primary Log-In

Used to set time to PM (between noon and midnight)

#131

#*4

Preference

Moves backwards through the scroll list one step at a time

Reference

page 238

page 224

page 188

page 77

page 233

page 164

page 92

page 238

page 156 page 156

page 80

page 59

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 280 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source

[Prim]

[Priv]

[Prnt]

[Prnt]

[Prnt]

[Prnt]

[Prog]

[Prtn]

[Puls]

[R/R]

[ReConn]

[Redl]

[REDIAL]

[Remd]

[Remv]

[Req]

COS

Setup

Trc aTrc aWk

Chrg fSet

SM, SM1 fSet>Lib>Code

ACD

Call

Feat

Fixed function key

Feat

Dir aWk

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means Reference

#10, #*0 COS Switchover (#149) - Select Primary COS

#186, #6 Boss Group: Privacy (on/off)

#1741 Malicious Call Trace - Printout

#1743

#1971

#1972

#139

Attendant Malicious Call Trace - Printout

Attendant Wakeup Report Printout

Station Call Charge Printout

Programming Key

page 93

page 238

page 140

page 217

page 220

page 222

page 238

#1448

#2

#1975

#122

Used to monitor the 2nd conversing party.

Private Library (#193) – Dialing Pulses

ACD/UCD: RLS/Resume all

Reconnect to party on (hold, park, etc.)

page 188

page 191

page 59

page 132

/

page 164

MENU Redial Number options: [Last] [Save] [ARdl]

#143N, * Last Number Redial

#172

#0

#1980

Reminder Request

Attendant Wakeup Request

page 179 page 179

page 183

Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Remove the displayed entry

page 98

page 220

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 281 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source Default

Feature

Code

N/A

What it Means

Ring Type Programming

[RS0] –

[RS15]

[RS0] –

[RS15]

[RST]

[RstA]

[Rsvd]

[rUCD]

[Safe]

[Save]

[Ring Type] OK >Userdef >Ring

Type

[Ring Volume] OK >Userdef >Ring

Volume

[RlsG] GpCl

[RlsP]

[Room]

GpCl

Feat

N/A

Room aRS

Chrg

Redl>ARdl tSet

ACD fSet

Call

Ring Volume Adjustment

#1447

#1446

MENU

Group Call. Release entire group

Group Call Release of a participant

Room Status and Canned Message options:

[RS0] [RS1]……[RS14] [RS15]

Room Status and Canned Message 0-15 #7026-

#7041

#7010-

#7025

#1978

#178

#159

#1991

Attendant Room Status and Canned Message 0-15

Station Call Charge Reset with Printout

Auto Redial - Restart All

Trunk Reserved To

UCD Release/Resume

#17700 Security Line (on/off)

#196, #9 Save External Number for future redialing

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 282 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Reference

page 247 page 247

page 128

page 127

page 185 page 185

page 218

page 222

page 179

page 233

page 59

page 238

page 179

Soft Key

[Save]

[Save]

[Seco]

[Ser]

[sGp#]

Dir

Redl

COS

Call bFwd

Source

[sGp#]

[S/HS]

[SM]

[SM1]

[SM2]

[Snz]

[Software

Vers.] aFwd, sSet

Call

Feat

SM

SM, Call

Call

OK>Userdef

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

N/A

#1323

MENU

#1448

#1981, hf-9

4

N/A

##,

#1994

Directory Personal (Edit/New) – Save the displayed entry

#196, #9 Saved Number Redial, from Idle State

#11, #*1 COS Switchover (#149) - Select Secondary COS

#195

#168,

#167,

#169,

#1984

Series Call

Enter Boss Group dial number in [bFwd]

• (#168) [FwdA]

• (#167) [Busy]

• (#169) [NA]

• (#1984) [Time]

• (#17709) [eTim]

Station/Group #, in Attendant features

Handset/Speaker

Silent Monitoring options: [SM1] [SM2]

Silent Monitor 1-Way Splitting

Silent Monitor 2-Way Both

On receiving Reminder and Wakeup Calls – Snooze

Firmware Software Version

283

Reference

page 98

page 179

page 93

page 45

page 71

page 213

page 23

page 188 page 188 page 188

page 183

page 248

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

[tGp#]

[Time]

[Time]

[Time]

Soft Key

[Spac]

[SPKR]

[Src]

[sRm#]

[sRmG]

[sSet]

[St#]

[Stop]

[Sys]

Source Default

Feature

Code

What it Means

Dir sSet

Call

Feat tSet

Sys aFwd

Fwd

#4

Fixed function key

Call

#120N

#1321 aWk>Req, aTrc, aRS, Chrg, sSet

#1980,

#1742,

#1743

N/A

Feat MENU

Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Insert a space between words

Speaker key

Exclude Source (Split Call)

Station/Room #, in Attendant features

Enter Station/Room/Group #, in Attendant features

Station Features – Setup (Attendant only):

[ChkO] [DND] [HotD] [HotI] [OrgO][NoTk] [Blck] [TrmO]

Enter Station #, in Attendant features

#130, # Stop Dial

MENU System Features - Setup (Attendant only):

[Alrm] [ATT2] [XD/N] [D/N1] [D/N2] [Lib] [Time]

N/A

#188

Enter Trunk Group #, in Attendant features

Time/Date Set

#1984

#1985

Attendant Call Forward Timed

Call Forward Timed

Reference

page 98

page 23

page 199

page 209 page 209

page 224 page 224

page 40

page 227

page 233

page 227

page 212

page 73

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes 284 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key Source

[UpCs]

[V/X]

[V/X]

[vDsp]

[vFrz]

[VPAA]

[VPg]

[Time] bFwd

[Time Zone] OK>Userdef

[Tk#] tSet

[Tone] fSet>Lib>Code

[Tone Type] OK>Userdef

[Trc]

[TrmO]

[tSet]

Feat sSet

Feat

Dir

Trc aTrc fSet>Lib>Code

Redl>ARdl fSet

Feat, Call

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

#1740

#1742

#5

#*6

#133

#191,

#3, hf-6

Default

Feature

Code

#1984

N/A

N/A

#3

N/A

MENU

#152

MENU

N/A

What it Means

Boss Group Call Forward Timed

Time Zone setting

Enter Trunk Dial Number in Attendant features

Private Library (#193) – Dialing DTMF Tones

Tone Type Programming

Malicious Call Trace options: [V/X] [Prnt]

Station Terminating Only

Trunk Features - Setup (Attendant only):

[AGrd] [Blck] [BOut] [DIL] [N1] [N2] [Drop] [HotI] [HotD] [IncO] [OutO] [Rsvd]

Directory (##, #1994) Personal – Toggle between lowercase and uppercase characters

Malicious Call Trace - on/off

Attendant Malicious Call Trace - on/off

Private Library (#193) – Enable Display

Auto Redial (#178) - Freeze (Hold Set for specific number)

Voice Page Auto Answer (on/off)

Voice Page activation

Reference

page 71

page 248

page 233

page 191

page 247

page 140

page 224

page 233

page 98

page 140

page 217

page 191

page 179

page 238

page 161

285 T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

Soft Key

[VPR]

[vPri]

[Wait]

[Wait]

[Wake]

[wDND]

Source

fSet

Redl>ARdl

Call

ACD

Feat fSet

[WPg]

[WrpC]

[WrpT]

[wtDT]

[XD/N]

[xDsp]

[xFrz]

[XFER]

[Xfer]

[xMsg]

[xPri]

Feat, Call

ACD

ACD fSet>Lib>Code

Sys fSet>Lib>Code

Redl>ARdl

Fixed function key

Call

Feat>Msg

Redl>ARdl

Index: Soft Keys and Feature Codes

#1744

#1977

#1976

#6

#1993

#4

#*7

#122N

#122

#1440

#*9

Default

Feature

Code

#134

#*8

#1325

#1982

#173

#1745

What it Means

Voice Page Receiving (on/off)

Auto Redial (#178) - Priority Assign

Number of Calls Waiting Display

ACD: Calls Waiting Display

Wake Up Request

Whisper Page, (DND) Receiving (on/off).

Not available in Coral versions 15.8 or higher.

Whisper Page, Announcing

ACD: Wrap-Up Code

ACD/UCD: Wrap-Up Time

Private Library (#193) – Wait for Dial Tone

Day/Night Transfer (Auto/Manual)

Private Library (#193) – Inhibit Display

Auto Redial (#178) - Restart (Cancel Freezing)

Transfer/Hookflash

Transfer/Hookflash

Message Cancel

Auto Redial (#178) - Cancel Priority

286

Reference

page 238

page 179

page 59

page 59

page 205

page 238

T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL User Guide

page 207

page 59

page 59

page 191

page 227

page 191

page 179

page 197 page 197

page 141

page 179

International Headquarters

Tadiran Telecom Ltd.

18 Hasivim Street P.O.Box 7607

Petach Tikva 49170 Israel

Tel. +972-3-9262000, Fax. +972-3-9262310

USA Headquarters

Tadiran Telecom, Inc.

4 Tri Harbor Court

Port Washington, NY 11050

Tel. +1-516-632-7200, Fax. +1-516-632-7210 http://www.tadirantele.com

I P

2 n d

Te l e p h o n e U s e r G u i d e

E d i t i o n 2 0 0 8

( C o r a l I P x a n d C o r a l F l e x i C o m )

advertisement

Key Features

  • Message waiting
  • Hold
  • Transfer
  • Conference
  • Speed dialing
  • SIP protocol support
  • PC connection
  • Telecommuting support

Frequently Answers and Questions

How do I make an internal call?
To make an internal call, press the dial pad and enter the extension number of the person you want to call. Then press the [OK] key to complete the call.
How do I make an external call?
To make an external call, press the dial pad and enter the phone number you want to call. Then press the [OK] key to complete the call.
How do I answer a call?
To answer a call, lift the handset or press the [OK] key.
How do I transfer a call?
Press the [Xfer] key to place the person on hold. Enter the extension number of the person you want to transfer the call to and press the [OK] key or press the [Xfer] key again to transfer the call directly to an external number.
How do I use the speakerphone?
Press the [SPKR] key to activate the speakerphone. You can adjust the volume by pressing the volume button.

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents